Nikon Digital Camera 1532 User Manual

DIGITAL CAMERA  
Reference Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And DownlEoadn.  
Table of Contents  
For Your Safety ............................................................................. x  
Notices......................................................................................... xiv  
Introduction  
1
Getting to Know the Camera ..................................................... 1  
The Camera Body................................................................................... 1  
The Mode Dial......................................................................................... 4  
The Viewfinder........................................................................................ 6  
The Information Display...................................................................... 7  
First Steps .................................................................................... 14  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
25  
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder.......................................... 26  
Viewing Photographs ....................................................................... 29  
Deleting Unwanted Pictures .......................................................... 30  
Framing Photos in the Monitor ............................................... 32  
Viewing Photographs ....................................................................... 35  
Deleting Unwanted Pictures .......................................................... 36  
Recording Movies ...................................................................... 37  
Viewing Movies ................................................................................... 39  
Deleting Unwanted Movies ............................................................ 40  
Guide Mode  
41  
The Guide..................................................................................... 41  
Guide Mode Menus............................................................................ 42  
Using the Guide................................................................................... 45  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation  
(Scene Mode)  
47  
k Portrait........................................................................................... 47  
l Landscape .................................................................................... 47  
p Child............................................................................................... 48  
m Sports ............................................................................................. 48  
n Close up ........................................................................................ 48  
o Night Portrait .............................................................................. 49  
Special Effects  
50  
% Night Vision ................................................................................. 51  
S Super Vivid ................................................................................... 51  
U Photo Illustration....................................................................... 52  
g Color Sketch................................................................................ 52  
' Toy Camera Effect...................................................................... 52  
( Miniature Effect.......................................................................... 53  
3 Selective Color............................................................................ 53  
1 Silhouette..................................................................................... 54  
2 High Key........................................................................................ 54  
3 Low Key......................................................................................... 54  
) HDR Painting ............................................................................... 55  
I Easy Panorama........................................................................... 55  
Options Available in Live View....................................................... 56  
I Easy Panorama ............................................................................... 63  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
More on Photography  
67  
Choosing a Release Mode......................................................... 67  
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)........................................ 68  
Quiet Shutter Release................................................................ 70  
Self-Timer Mode ......................................................................... 71  
Focus (Viewfinder Photography) ............................................ 74  
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode.................. 74  
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:  
AF-Area Mode.................................................................................. 78  
Focus Point Selection........................................................................ 80  
Focus Lock............................................................................................. 81  
Image Quality and Size ............................................................. 85  
Image Quality....................................................................................... 85  
Image Size ............................................................................................. 87  
Using the Built-in Flash............................................................. 89  
Auto Pop-up Modes........................................................................... 89  
Manual Pop-up Modes ..................................................................... 91  
ISO Sensitivity............................................................................. 95  
Remote Control Photography ................................................. 97  
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control ................................ 97  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
100  
Shutter Speed and Aperture ................................................. 100  
Mode P (Programmed Auto)........................................................ 102  
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto).................................................... 104  
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)................................................ 106  
Mode M (Manual)............................................................................. 108  
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only) ...................................... 110  
Exposure.................................................................................... 114  
Metering.............................................................................................. 114  
Autoexposure Lock.......................................................................... 116  
Exposure Compensation ............................................................... 118  
Flash Compensation ....................................................................... 120  
Active D-Lighting ............................................................................. 122  
White Balance........................................................................... 124  
Fine-Tuning White Balance .......................................................... 127  
Preset Manual.................................................................................... 129  
Picture Controls ....................................................................... 135  
Selecting a Picture Control ........................................................... 135  
Modifying Picture Controls........................................................... 137  
Live View  
142  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor.................................. 142  
Focusing in Live View ..................................................................... 144  
The Live View Display ..................................................................... 148  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording and Viewing Movies  
155  
Recording Movies .................................................................... 155  
Movie Settings................................................................................... 158  
Viewing Movies ........................................................................ 162  
Editing Movies .......................................................................... 164  
Trimming Movies.............................................................................. 164  
Saving Selected Frames ................................................................. 168  
Playback and Deletion  
170  
Full-Frame Playback ................................................................ 170  
Photo Information............................................................................ 172  
Thumbnail Playback ................................................................ 180  
Calendar Playback ................................................................... 181  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom.................................. 182  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion............................... 184  
Rating Pictures.......................................................................... 186  
Rating Individual Pictures.............................................................. 186  
Rating Multiple Pictures................................................................. 187  
Selecting Pictures for Upload ................................................ 189  
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload.................................. 189  
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload..................................... 190  
Deleting Photographs............................................................. 192  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback.................... 192  
The Playback Menu.......................................................................... 193  
Slide Shows ............................................................................... 198  
Slide Show Options.......................................................................... 200  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Connections  
201  
Installing ViewNX 2 ................................................................. 201  
Using ViewNX 2........................................................................ 204  
Copy Pictures to the Computer .................................................. 204  
View Pictures...................................................................................... 206  
Printing Photographs ............................................................. 208  
Connecting the Printer................................................................... 208  
Printing Pictures One at a Time................................................... 209  
Printing Multiple Pictures.............................................................. 211  
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set..................................... 213  
Viewing Pictures on TV........................................................... 215  
Standard Definition Devices ........................................................ 215  
Camera Menus  
219  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ................................ 219  
Playback Folder ............................................................................ 220  
Playback Display Options ......................................................... 220  
Image Review................................................................................ 221  
Rotate Tall....................................................................................... 221  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options................................. 222  
Reset Shooting Menu................................................................. 224  
Auto Distortion Control............................................................. 225  
Color Space.................................................................................... 225  
Noise Reduction........................................................................... 226  
ISO Sensitivity Settings.............................................................. 226  
Built-in AF-assist Illuminator.................................................... 229  
Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash..................................................... 229  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup............................................... 231  
Reset Setup Options ................................................................... 233  
Format Memory Card ................................................................. 234  
Monitor Brightness...................................................................... 235  
Info Display Format ..................................................................... 236  
Auto Info Display.......................................................................... 238  
Image Dust Off Ref Photo.......................................................... 239  
Flicker Reduction.......................................................................... 241  
Time Zone and Date.................................................................... 242  
Language ........................................................................................ 243  
Auto Image Rotation................................................................... 243  
Image Comment .......................................................................... 244  
Auto off Timers ............................................................................. 245  
Remote on Duration (ML-L3) ................................................... 247  
Beep .................................................................................................. 247  
Rangefinder.................................................................................... 248  
File Number Sequence............................................................... 249  
Buttons............................................................................................. 251  
Slot Empty Release Lock............................................................ 253  
Print Date ........................................................................................ 254  
Storage Folder............................................................................... 257  
Accessory Terminal...................................................................... 258  
Video Mode.................................................................................... 260  
Wireless Mobile Adapter ........................................................... 260  
Eye-Fi Upload................................................................................. 261  
Firmware Version ......................................................................... 262  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies ...................... 263  
Creating Retouched Copies.......................................................... 264  
D-Lighting ...................................................................................... 266  
Red-Eye Correction ..................................................................... 267  
Trim................................................................................................... 268  
Monochrome ................................................................................ 269  
Filter Effects ................................................................................... 270  
Color Balance ................................................................................ 271  
Image Overlay............................................................................... 272  
NEF (RAW) Processing................................................................ 275  
Resize ............................................................................................... 277  
Quick Retouch............................................................................... 279  
Straighten....................................................................................... 279  
Fisheye............................................................................................. 280  
Color Outline................................................................................. 281  
Photo Illustration ......................................................................... 281  
Color Sketch................................................................................... 282  
Perspective Control .................................................................... 282  
Miniature Effect............................................................................ 283  
Selective Color.............................................................................. 284  
Side-by-side Comparison.......................................................... 286  
m Recent Settings ................................................................... 288  
viii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Technical Notes  
289  
Compatible Lenses................................................................... 289  
Compatible CPU Lenses ................................................................. 289  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses ....................................................... 292  
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)....................................... 299  
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative Lighting System  
(CLS) .................................................................................................. 299  
Other Accessories..................................................................... 306  
Approved Memory Cards............................................................... 310  
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter..................... 311  
Caring for the Camera ............................................................. 313  
Storage ................................................................................................. 313  
Image Sensor Cleaning................................................................... 314  
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..................... 321  
Caring for the Camera..................................................................... 321  
Caring for the Battery...................................................................... 324  
Available Settings .................................................................... 326  
Troubleshooting....................................................................... 329  
Battery/Display.................................................................................. 329  
Shooting (All Modes)....................................................................... 330  
Shooting (P, S, A, M) ....................................................................... 333  
Playback............................................................................................... 334  
Miscellaneous .................................................................................... 335  
Error Messages.......................................................................... 336  
Specifications............................................................................ 342  
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II................... 353  
Memory Card Capacity............................................................ 362  
Battery Life ................................................................................ 363  
Index........................................................................................... 365  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,  
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this  
equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the  
product will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions  
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all  
warnings before using this Nikon product.  
A
❚❚ WARNINGS  
AKeep the sun out of the frame  
Keep the sun well out of the frame  
when shooting backlit subjects.  
Sunlight focused into the camera  
when the sun is in or close to the  
frame could cause a fire.  
ATurn off immediately in the event of  
malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an  
unusual smell coming from the  
equipment or AC adapter (available  
separately), unplug the AC adapter  
and remove the battery immediately,  
taking care to avoid burns.  
ADo not look at the sun through the  
viewfinder  
Continued operation could result in  
injury. After removing the battery,  
take the equipment to a Nikon-  
authorized service center for  
inspection.  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
AUsing the viewfinder diopter adjustment  
control  
ADo not use in the presence of flammable  
gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in  
the presence of flammable gas, as  
this could result in explosion or fire.  
When operating the viewfinder  
diopter adjustment control with your  
eye to the viewfinder, care should be  
taken not to put your finger in your  
eye accidentally.  
AKeep out of reach of children  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in injury. In addition,  
note that small parts constitute a  
choking hazard. Should a child  
swallow any part of this equipment,  
consult a physician immediately.  
x
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
ADo not disassemble  
AObserve caution when using the flash  
Using the camera with the flash in  
close contact with the skin or other  
objects could cause burns.  
Using the flash close to the subject’s  
eyes could cause temporary visual  
impairment. The flash should be no  
less than one meter (3 ft 4 in.) from  
the subject. Particular care should  
be observed when photographing  
infants.  
Touching the product’s internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified  
technician. Should the product break  
open as the result of a fall or other  
accident, remove the battery and/or  
AC adapter and then take the product  
to a Nikon-authorized service center  
for inspection.  
ADo not place the strap around the neck of AAvoid contact with liquid crystal  
an infant or child  
Should the monitor break, care  
Placing the camera strap around the  
neck of an infant or child could result  
in strangulation.  
should be taken to avoid injury due to  
broken glass and to prevent the liquid  
crystal from the monitor touching the  
skin or entering the eyes or mouth.  
ADo not remain in contact with the  
camera, battery, or charger for extended ADo not carry tripods with a lens or camera  
periods while the devices are on or in use  
Parts of the device become hot.  
Leaving the device in direct contact  
with the skin for extended periods  
may result in low-temperature burns.  
attached  
You could trip or accidentally strike  
others, resulting in injury.  
ADo not leave the product where it will be  
exposed to extremely high  
temperatures, such as in an enclosed  
automobile or in direct sunlight  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could cause damage or fire.  
ADo not aim a flash at the operator of a  
motor vehicle  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in accidents.  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AObserve proper precautions when  
handling batteries  
Discontinue use immediately  
should you notice any changes in  
the battery, such as discoloration or  
deformation.  
Batteries may leak or explode if  
improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling  
batteries for use in this product:  
Use only batteries approved for use  
in this equipment.  
AObserve proper precautions when  
handling the charger  
Keep dry. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in injury or  
product malfunction due to fire or  
electric shock.  
Do not short or disassemble the  
battery.  
Be sure the product is off before  
replacing the battery. If you are  
using an AC adapter, be sure it is  
unplugged.  
Do not short the charger terminals.  
Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in overheating and  
damage to the charger.  
Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
Do not expose the battery to flame  
or to excessive heat.  
Do not immerse in or expose to  
water.  
Replace the terminal cover when  
transporting the battery. Do not  
transport or store the battery with  
metal objects such as necklaces or  
hairpins.  
Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage  
to the product, be sure to remove  
the battery when no charge  
remains.  
Dust on or near the metal parts of  
the plug should be removed with a  
dry cloth. Continued use could  
result in fire.  
Do not go near the charger during  
thunderstorms. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in  
electric shock.  
Do not handle the plug or charger  
with wet hands. Failure to observe  
this precaution could result in injury  
or product malfunction due to fire or  
electric shock.  
Do not use with travel converters or  
adapters designed to convert from  
one voltage to another or with DC-  
to-AC inverters. Failure to observe  
this precaution could damage the  
product or cause overheating or fire.  
When the battery is not in use,  
attach the terminal cover and store  
in a cool, dry place.  
The battery may be hot  
immediately after use or when the  
product has been used on battery  
power for an extended period.  
Before removing the battery turn  
the camera off and allow the battery  
to cool.  
xii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AUse appropriate cables  
AFollow the directions of airline and  
hospital personnel  
This camera transmits radio  
When connecting cables to the input  
and output jacks, use only the cables  
provided or sold by Nikon for the  
purpose to maintain compliance with  
product regulations.  
frequencies that could interfere with  
medical equipment or aircraft  
navigation. Disable the wireless  
network feature and remove all  
wireless accessories from the camera  
before boarding an aircraft, and turn  
the camera off during take off and  
landing. In medical facilities, follow  
staff instructions regarding the use of  
wireless devices.  
ACD-ROMs  
CD-ROMs containing software or  
manuals should not be played back  
on audio CD equipment. Playing CD-  
ROMs on an audio CD player could  
cause hearing loss or damage the  
equipment.  
xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices  
No part of the manuals included  
with this product may be  
reproduced, transmitted,  
Nikon will not be held liable for any  
damages resulting from the use of  
this product.  
transcribed, stored in a retrieval  
system, or translated into any  
While every effort has been made to  
ensure that the information in these  
language in any form, by any means, manuals is accurate and complete,  
without Nikon’s prior written  
permission.  
we would appreciate it were you to  
bring any errors or omissions to the  
attention of the Nikon  
representative in your area (address  
provided separately).  
Nikon reserves the right to change  
the specifications of the hardware  
and software described in these  
manuals at any time and without  
prior notice.  
Notice for Customers in Canada  
CAN ICES-3 B / NMB-3 B  
Notices for Customers in Europe  
CAUTION: RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT  
TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS.  
This symbol indicates that  
electrical and electronic  
equipment is to be  
This symbol on the battery  
indicates that the battery  
is to be collected  
collected separately.  
separately.  
The following apply only  
The following apply only to users in  
European countries:  
All batteries, whether marked with  
this symbol or not, are designated  
to users in European countries:  
This product is designated for  
separate collection at an  
appropriate collection point. Do not for separate collection at an  
dispose of as household waste.  
Separate collection and recycling  
helps conserve natural resources  
appropriate collection point. Do not  
dispose of as household waste.  
For more information, contact the  
and prevent negative consequences retailer or the local authorities in  
for human health and the  
charge of waste management.  
environment that might result from  
incorrect disposal.  
For more information, contact the  
retailer or the local authorities in  
charge of waste management.  
xiv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.  
The Battery Charger  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS—SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS  
DANGER—TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC  
SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS  
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter  
of the proper configuration for the power outlet if needed. This power unit  
is intended to be correctly oriented in a vertical or floor mount position.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and  
found to comply with the limits for a  
Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15  
of the FCC rules. These limits are  
D3300  
designed to provide reasonable  
protection against harmful interference  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
in a residential installation. This  
The FCC requires the user be notified  
equipment generates, uses, and can  
that any changes or modifications  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if  
made to this device that are not  
not installed and used in accordance  
expressly approved by Nikon  
with the instructions, may cause harmful  
Corporation may void the user’s  
interference to radio communications.  
authority to operate the equipment.  
However, there is no guarantee that  
Interface Cables  
interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does  
cause harmful interference to radio or  
television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment  
off and on, the user is encouraged to try  
to correct the interference by one or  
more of the following measures:  
Reorient or relocate the receiving  
antenna.  
Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an  
outlet on a circuit different from that  
to which the receiver is connected.  
Use the interface cables sold or  
provided by Nikon for your  
equipment. Using other interface  
cables may exceed the limits of Class  
B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for Customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this  
product may expose you to lead, a  
chemical known to the State of  
California to cause birth defects or  
other reproductive harm. Wash hands  
after handling.  
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,  
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.  
Tel.: 631-547-4200  
Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
xv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally  
copied or reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device  
may be punishable by law.  
Items prohibited by law from being copied Cautions on certain copies and  
or reproduced  
reproductions  
Do not copy or reproduce paper  
The government has issued cautions  
money, coins, securities, government on copies or reproductions of  
bonds, or local government bonds,  
even if such copies or reproductions  
are stamped “Sample.”  
securities issued by private  
companies (shares, bills, checks, gift  
certificates, etc.), commuter passes, or  
coupon tickets, except when a  
minimum of necessary copies are to  
be provided for business use by a  
company. Also, do not copy or  
reproduce passports issued by the  
government, licenses issued by public  
agencies and private groups, ID cards,  
and tickets, such as passes and meal  
coupons.  
The copying or reproduction of  
paper money, coins, or securities  
which are circulated in a foreign  
country is prohibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused  
postage stamps or post cards issued  
by the government is prohibited.  
Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of  
stamps issued by the government  
and of certified documents  
The copying or reproduction of  
copyrighted creative works such as  
books, music, paintings, woodcuts,  
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and  
photographs is governed by national  
and international copyright laws. Do  
not use this product for the purpose  
of making illegal copies or to infringe  
copyright laws.  
stipulated by law is prohibited.  
xvi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Disposing of Data Storage Devices  
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data  
storage devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted  
files can sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using  
commercially available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of  
personal image data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s  
responsibility.  
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another  
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the  
device and then completely refill it with images containing no private  
information (for example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any  
pictures selected for preset manual (0 129). Care should be taken to avoid  
injury when physically destroying data storage devices.  
AVC Patent Portfolio License  
THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL  
AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH  
THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED  
BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS  
OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS  
GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE  
OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE http://www.mpegla.com  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex  
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including  
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon  
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven  
to operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic  
circuitry.  
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage  
the camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of  
third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the  
Nikon holographic seal shown at right could interfere with  
normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries overheating,  
igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local  
authorized Nikon dealer.  
xvii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories  
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use  
with your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate  
within its operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON  
ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON  
WARRANTY.  
A Before Taking Important Pictures  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or  
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the  
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for  
damages or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.  
A Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing  
product support and education, continually-updated information is  
available on-line at the following sites:  
For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support/  
For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,  
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice  
on digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be  
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following  
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/  
xviii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Introduction  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls  
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section  
and refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.  
The Camera Body  
1 Movie-record button .......... 38, 156 8 Command dial  
2 Power switch.................................. 17 9 Mode dial...........................................4  
3
Shutter-release button...........27, 28 10 A/L button ..............81, 184, 252  
4 E/N button...............109, 118, 120 11 Accessory shoe (for optional flash  
units) ............................................ 299  
5 R (information) button...........7, 150  
12 Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote  
6 Eyelets for camera strap.............. 14  
control (rear) ................................98  
7 Speaker  
13 Focal plane mark (E).................. 84  
D The Speaker  
Do not place the speaker in close proximity to magnetic devices.  
Failure to observe this precaution could affect the data recorded on  
the magnetic devices.  
Introduction  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
14 AF-assist illuminator ............77, 229 23 CPU contacts  
Self-timer lamp ..............................72  
24 Mirror............................................. 318  
Red-eye reduction lamp .......90, 92  
15 Built-in flash....................................89  
16 M/ Y button..................89, 91, 120  
17 Microphone ................................. 158  
18 Connector cover  
25 Lens mount.............................. 16, 84  
26 Body cap  
27 Accessory terminal..................... 309  
28 Connector for external  
microphone................................ 161  
19 Fn button ...................................... 251  
20 Mounting mark ..............................16  
29 USB and A/V connector  
..................................... 204, 208, 215  
21 Lens release button.......................24 30 HDMI mini-pin connector ........ 217  
22 Infrared receiver for ML-L3 remote  
control (front)................................98  
2
Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
31 Rubber eyecup .............................. 73 43 O button ................................ 30, 192  
32 Viewfinder eyepiece.......... 6, 20, 73 44 Memory card access lamp  
................................................ 28, 143  
33 Diopter adjustment control ....... 20  
45 Battery-chamber cover latch  
34 K button............................... 29, 170  
...................................................15, 22  
35 G button........................... 10, 219  
46 Battery-chamber cover .........15, 22  
36 X button .......................................182  
47 I/E/# button....67, 68, 70, 71, 97  
37 W/Q button................ 11, 180, 182  
48 Tripod socket  
38 P button....................................9, 171  
49 Monitor ...............7, 29, 32, 142, 170  
39 a button................32, 37, 142, 155  
50 Battery latch.............................15, 22  
40 J (OK) button............................... 11  
41 Multi selector................................. 11  
optional power connector ...... 311  
42 Memory card slot cover.........15, 23  
Introduction  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The Mode Dial  
The camera offers a choice of the following shooting modes and  
g mode:  
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Select these modes for full control over camera settings.  
P—Programmed auto (0 102)  
S —Shutter-priority auto (0 104)  
A—Aperture-priority auto (0 106)  
M—Manual (0 108)  
g Mode (0 41)  
Take, view, and edit pictures and  
adjust settings with the help of  
an on-screen guide.  
Auto Modes  
Select these modes for simple,  
point-and-shoot photography.  
i Auto (0 25)  
j Auto (flash off) (0 25)  
4
Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Special Effects Modes  
Use special effects during shooting.  
% Night vision (0 51)  
S Super vivid (0 51)  
3 Selective color (0 53, 61)  
1 Silhouette (0 54)  
T Pop (0 51)  
2 High key (0 54)  
U Photo illustration (0 52, 56)  
g Color sketch (0 52, 57)  
' Toy camera effect (0 52, 58)  
( Miniature effect (0 53, 59)  
3 Low key (0 54)  
) HDR painting (0 55)  
I Easy panorama (0 55, 63)  
Scene Modes  
The camera automatically optimizes settings to suit the scene selected  
with the mode dial. Match your selection to the scene being  
photographed.  
k Portrait (0 47)  
l Landscape (0 47)  
p Child (0 48)  
m Sports (0 48)  
n Close up (0 48)  
o Night portrait (0 49)  
Introduction  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                                       
The Viewfinder  
1 Focus points...................... 20, 27, 80 9 “k” (appears when memory  
..........................................................19  
2 Focus indicator........................27, 84  
3 Autoexposure (AE) lock indicator  
....................................................... 116  
10 Flash-ready indicator....................31  
11 Flexible program indicator....... 103  
4 Shutter speed .............................. 101  
12 Exposure indicator ..................... 109  
Exposure compensation display  
....................................................... 118  
Electronic rangefinder .............. 248  
5 Aperture (f-number).................. 101  
6 Special effects mode indicator...50  
7 Low battery warning ....................21  
8 Number of exposures remaining  
13 Flash compensation indicator  
..........................................................19  
....................................................... 120  
Number of shots remaining before  
14 Exposure compensation indicator  
memory buffer fills ......................69  
White balance recording indicator  
....................................................... 129  
Exposure compensation value  
15 Auto ISO sensitivity indicator  
....................................................... 227  
....................................................... 118 16 Warning indicator ...................... 336  
Flash compensation value........ 120  
ISO sensitivity ........................95, 226  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
6
Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The Information Display  
Viewing settings: To view the information  
display, press the R button.  
R button  
1 Shooting mode  
4 Print date indicator .................... 254  
i auto/  
j auto (flash off).................... 25  
Scene modes............................ 47  
Special effects mode.............. 50  
P, S, A, and M modes.............100  
5 Flash control indicator............... 229  
Flash compensation indicator for  
optional flash units................... 304  
6 Active D-Lighting ....................... 122  
7 Picture Control ............................ 135  
9 “Beep” indicator.......................... 247  
2 Eye-Fi connection indicator .....261  
3 Satellite signal indicator............260  
Introduction  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
10 Aperture (f-number).................. 101 16 Number of exposures remaining  
Aperture display ......................... 101  
..........................................................19  
White balance recording indicator  
....................................................... 129  
11 Shutter speed.............................. 101  
Shutter-speed display ............... 101  
17 “k” (appears when memory  
remains for over 1000 exposures)  
..........................................................19  
12 Autoexposure (AE) lock indicator  
....................................................... 116  
13 Auto-area AF indicator.................78  
3D-tracking indicator ...................78  
Focus point......................................80  
18 Exposure indicator ..................... 109  
Exposure compensation indicator  
....................................................... 118  
14 Battery indicator............................21  
19 Help icon ...................................... 336  
15 ISO sensitivity .................................95  
ISO sensitivity display..........95, 228  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator  
....................................................... 227  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
A Turning the Monitor Off  
To clear shooting information from the monitor, press the R button or  
press the shutter-release button halfway. The monitor will turn off  
automatically if no operations are performed for about 8 seconds (for  
information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Auto off  
timers on page 245).  
8
Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Changing settings: To change the settings at  
the bottom of the display, press the P  
button, then highlight items using the  
multi selector and press J to view  
options for the highlighted item.  
P button  
1 White balance..............................124 6 Exposure compensation ........... 118  
2 Image size....................................... 87 7 Flash compensation................... 120  
3 Image quality................................. 85 8 Metering ....................................... 114  
4 Flash mode...............................90, 92 9 AF-area mode....................... 78, 145  
5 ISO sensitivity ................................ 95 10 Focus mode........................... 74, 144  
Introduction  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Camera Menus: An Overview  
Most shooting, playback, and setup  
options can be accessed from the camera  
menus. To view the menus, press the  
G button.  
G button  
Tabs  
Choose from the following menus:  
D: Playback (0 219)  
C: Shooting (0 222)  
B: Setup (0 231)  
N: Retouch (0 263)  
m: Recent settings (0 288)  
Current settings are shown by  
icons.  
Menu options  
Options in current menu.  
Help icon (0 11)  
10 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Using Camera Menus  
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the  
camera menus.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select  
highlighted item  
Cancel and return to  
previous menu  
Select highlighted item or  
display sub-menu  
Move cursor down  
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.  
1
Display the menus.  
Press the G button to display the  
menus.  
G button  
A The d (Help) Icon  
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left corner of the monitor, help  
can be displayed by pressing the W (Q) button. A description of the  
currently selected option or menu will be displayed while the button is  
pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the display.  
W (Q) button  
Introduction 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
3
Highlight the icon for the  
current menu.  
Press 4 to highlight the  
icon for the current menu.  
Select a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.  
4
5
Position the cursor in the  
selected menu.  
Press 2 to position the  
cursor in the selected  
menu.  
Highlight a menu item.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a  
menu item.  
12 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
7
8
Display options.  
Press 2 to display options  
for the selected menu item.  
Highlight an option.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
an option.  
Select the highlighted item.  
Press J to select the highlighted  
item. To exit without making a  
selection, press the G button.  
Note the following:  
Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently  
available.  
While pressing 2 generally has the same effect as pressing J,  
there are some cases in which selection can only be made by  
pressing J.  
To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the  
shutter-release button halfway (0 28).  
Introduction 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
First Steps  
Always turn the camera off before inserting or removing  
batteries or memory cards.  
1
Attach the strap.  
Attach the strap as shown. Repeat for the second eyelet.  
2
Charge the battery.  
If a plug adapter is supplied, raise the wall plug and connect  
the plug adapter as shown below at left, making sure the  
plug is fully inserted. Insert the battery and plug the charger  
in. An exhausted battery will fully charge in about an hour  
and 50 minutes.  
Battery charging  
Charging complete  
14 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Insert the battery and memory card.  
Insert the battery in the orientation shown, using the battery  
to keep the orange battery latch pressed to one side. The  
latch locks the battery in place when the battery is fully  
inserted.  
Battery latch  
Slide the memory card in until it clicks into place.  
Introduction 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Attach a lens.  
Be careful to prevent dust from entering the camera when  
the lens or body cap is removed.  
Remove the camera  
body cap  
Remove the rear  
lens cap  
Mounting mark (camera)  
Align the mounting  
marks  
Mounting mark (lens)  
Rotate the lens as shown until it clicks into place.  
Be sure to remove the lens cap before  
taking pictures.  
16 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
5
Turn the camera on.  
A language-selection  
dialog will be displayed.  
A The Power Switch  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera on.  
Rotate the power switch as shown to turn the camera off.  
A Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons  
Before using the camera, unlock and extend the zoom ring. Keeping  
the retractable lens barrel button pressed (q), rotate the zoom ring as  
shown (w).  
Retractable lens barrel button  
Pictures can not be taken when the lens is  
retracted; if an error message is displayed as  
a result of the camera having been turned  
on with the lens retracted, rotate the zoom  
ring until the message is no longer  
displayed.  
Introduction 17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6
Choose a language and  
set the camera clock.  
Use the multi selector and  
J button to select a  
language and set the  
camera clock.  
Move cursor up  
J button: select  
highlighted item  
Select highlighted  
item or display sub-  
menu  
Move cursor down  
q
w
e
Select language  
Select time zone  
Select date format  
r
t
Select daylight  
saving time option  
Set time and date  
(note that the  
camera uses a 24-  
hour clock)  
18 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
7
Check the battery level and number of exposures  
remaining.  
Press the R button and check the  
battery level and number of  
exposures remaining. In the case of  
exposures remaining, values over  
1000 are shown in thousands,  
indicated by the letter “k.  
R button  
Battery level (0 21)  
Number of exposures  
remaining  
Introduction 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
8
Focus the viewfinder.  
After removing the lens  
cap, rotate the diopter  
adjustment control until  
the focus points are in  
sharp focus. When  
operating the control with  
your eye to the viewfinder, be careful not to put your fingers  
or fingernails in your eye.  
Focus points  
Viewfinder not in focus  
Viewfinder in focus  
D During Charging  
Do not move the charger or touch the battery during charging. Failure  
to observe this precaution could in very rare instances result in the  
charger showing that charging is complete when the battery is only  
partially charged. Remove and reinsert the battery to begin charging  
again.  
20 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D Charging the Battery  
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages x–xiii and 321–325  
of this manual. Charge the battery indoors at ambient temperatures of  
5 °C–35 °C (41 °F–95 °F). Do not use the battery at ambient  
temperatures below 0 °C/32 °F or above 40 °C/104 °F; failure to observe  
this precaution could damage the battery or impair its performance.  
Capacity may be reduced and charging times may increase at battery  
temperatures from 0 °C/32 °F to 15 °C/59 °F and from 45 °C/113 °F to  
60 °C/140 °F. The battery will not charge if its temperature is below 0 °C  
(32 °F) or above 60 °C (140 °F). If the CHARGE lamp flashes quickly (about  
eight times a second) during charging, confirm that the temperature is  
in the correct range and then unplug the charger and remove and  
reinsert the battery. If the problem persists, cease use immediately  
and take battery and charger to your retailer or a Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in  
use.  
A Battery Level  
Battery level is shown in the information  
display (if the battery is low, a warning will  
also be displayed in the viewfinder). If the  
information display does not appear when  
the R button is pressed, the battery is  
exhausted and needs to be recharged.  
Information  
display  
L
Viewfinder  
Description  
Battery fully charged.  
Battery partially discharged.  
K
Low battery. Ready fully-charged spare  
battery or prepare to charge battery.  
H
d
H
(flashes)  
d
(flashes)  
Battery exhausted. Charge battery.  
Introduction 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Removing the Battery  
To remove the battery, turn the camera off  
and open the battery-chamber cover. Press  
the battery latch in the direction shown by  
the arrow to release the battery and then  
remove the battery by hand.  
A Formatting Memory Cards  
If this is the first time the memory card will  
be used in the camera or if the card has been  
formatted in another device, select Format  
memory card in the setup menu and follow  
the on-screen instructions to format the card  
(0 234). Note that this permanently deletes  
any data the card may contain. Be sure to  
copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a computer  
before proceeding.  
D Memory Cards  
Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when  
removing memory cards from the camera.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do  
not remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or  
remove or disconnect the power source during formatting or while  
data are being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to  
observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to  
the camera or card.  
Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this  
precaution could damage the card.  
Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct  
sunlight.  
Do not format memory cards in a computer.  
22 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Removing Memory Cards  
After confirming that the memory card  
access lamp is off, turn the camera off, open  
the memory card slot cover, and press the  
card in to eject it (q). The card can then be  
removed by hand (w).  
A The Write Protect Switch  
SD memory cards are equipped  
with a write protect switch to  
prevent accidental loss of data.  
When this switch is in the “lock”  
position, the memory card can not  
be formatted and photos can not  
G B 1 6  
Write-protect switch  
be deleted or recorded (a beep will sound if you attempt to release the  
shutter). To unlock the memory card, slide the switch to the “write”  
position.  
A A-M, M/A-M, A/M-M, and Vibration Reduction (VR) Switches  
When using autofocus with a lens equipped  
with an A-M mode switch, slide the switch to  
A (if the lens has an M/A-M or A/M-M switch,  
select M/A or A/M). For information on other  
lenses that can be used with this camera, see  
page 289.  
If the lens has a vibration reduction (VR)  
switch, select ON to reduce the effects of  
vibration (0 355).  
Introduction 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or  
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens,  
press and hold the lens release button (q)  
while turning the lens clockwise (w). After  
removing the lens, replace the lens caps and  
camera body cap.  
A Retracting Lenses with Retractable Lens Barrel Buttons  
To retract the lens when the camera is not in  
use, hold the retractable lens barrel button  
(q) and rotate the zoom ring to the “L(lock)  
position as shown (w). Retract the lens  
before removing it from the camera, and be  
careful not to press the retractable lens  
barrel button when attaching or removing  
the lens.  
A The Camera Clock  
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household  
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces  
and reset as necessary.  
A The Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power  
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is  
installed. Three days of charging will power the clock for about a  
month. If a message warning that the clock is not set is displayed  
when the camera is turned on, the clock battery is exhausted and the  
clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time and date.  
24 Introduction  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
This section describes how to shoot  
photographs and movies in i and j modes,  
automatic “point-and-shoot” modes in which  
the majority of settings are controlled by the  
camera in response to shooting conditions.  
Before proceeding, turn the  
camera on and rotate the  
mode dial to i or j (the only  
difference between the two is  
that the flash will not fire in j  
mode).  
Mode dial  
Viewfinder photography  
Taking photographs  
Viewing photographs  
Deleting photographs  
0 26  
0 29  
0 30  
Live view  
Taking photographs  
Viewing photographs  
Deleting photographs  
Shooting movies  
0 32  
0 35  
0 36  
0 37  
0 39  
0 40  
Viewing movies  
Deleting movies  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Framing Photos in the Viewfinder  
1
Ready the camera.  
When framing photographs in the viewfinder, hold the  
handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera body or  
lens with your left.  
When framing photographs in  
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the  
camera as shown at right.  
A Using a Zoom Lens  
Use the zoom ring to zoom in on the subject  
so that it fills a larger area of the frame, or  
Zoom in  
zoom out to increase the area visible in the  
final photograph (select longer focal lengths  
on the lens focal length scale to zoom in,  
shorter focal lengths to zoom out). If the lens  
is equipped with a retractable lens barrel  
button (0 17), press and hold the button  
while rotating the zoom ring until the lens is  
released and the message shown at right is  
no longer displayed, and then adjust zoom  
using the zoom ring.  
Zoom out  
Zoom ring  
26 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Frame the photograph.  
Frame a photograph in the viewfinder  
with the main subject in at least one  
of the 11 focus points.  
Focus point  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus (if  
the subject is poorly lit, the  
flash may pop up and the  
AF-assist illuminator may  
light). When the focus  
operation is complete, a  
In-focus  
indicator  
Buffer  
capacity  
beep will sound (a beep may not sound if the subject is  
moving) and the in-focus indicator (I) will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
In-focus indicator  
I
Description  
Subject in focus.  
I
Camera unable to focus using autofocus. See  
page 76.  
(flashes)  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4
Shoot.  
Smoothly press the shutter-  
release button the rest of  
the way down to take the  
photograph. The memory  
card access lamp will light  
and the photograph will be  
displayed in the monitor for  
a few seconds. Do not eject  
the memory card or remove  
or disconnect the power  
source until the lamp has  
gone out and recording is  
complete.  
Memory card access lamp  
A The Shutter-Release Button  
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera  
focuses when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take  
the photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way  
down.  
Focus: press halfway  
Shoot: press all the  
way down  
Pressing the shutter-release button halfway also ends playback and  
readies the camera for immediate use.  
28 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing Photographs  
Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.  
K button  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Deleting Unwanted Pictures  
Display the photograph you wish to  
delete.  
K button  
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be  
displayed.  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the  
picture.  
30 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A The Standby Timer  
The viewfinder and information display will turn off if no  
operations are performed for about eight seconds,  
reducing the drain on the battery. Press the shutter-  
release button halfway to reactivate the display. The  
length of time before the standby timer expires  
automatically can be selected using the Auto off timers option in the  
setup menu (0 245).  
Exposure meters off  
A The Built-in Flash  
Exposure meters on  
If additional lighting is required for correct  
exposure in i mode, the built-in flash will  
pop up automatically when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway (0 89). If  
the flash is raised, photographs can only be  
taken when the flash-ready indicator (M) is  
displayed. If the flash-ready indicator is not  
displayed, the flash is charging; remove your  
finger briefly from the shutter-release  
button and try again.  
When the flash is not in use, return it to its  
closed position by pressing it gently  
downward till the latch clicks into place.  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Framing Photos in the Monitor  
1
Press the a button.  
The view through the lens will be  
displayed in the camera monitor (live  
view).  
a button  
2
Ready the camera.  
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera  
body or lens with your left.  
When framing photographs in  
portrait (tall) orientation, hold the  
camera as shown at right.  
32 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Focus.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway. The focus  
point will flash green while  
the camera focuses. If the  
camera is able to focus, the  
focus point will be  
Focus point  
displayed in green; if the  
camera is unable to focus, the focus point will flash red.  
Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down. The monitor turns  
off and the memory card  
access lamp lights during  
recording. Do not eject the  
Memory card access lamp  
memory card or remove or  
disconnect the power source  
until the lamp has gone out  
and recording is complete.  
When recording is  
complete, the photograph  
will be displayed in the  
monitor for a few seconds.  
Press the a button to exit live view.  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Automatic Scene Selection (Scene Auto Selector)  
If live view is selected in i or j mode, the  
camera will automatically analyze the  
subject and select the appropriate shooting  
mode when autofocus is enabled. The  
selected mode is shown in the monitor.  
c
d
e
Portrait  
Landscape  
Close up  
Human portrait subjects  
Landscapes and cityscapes  
Subjects close to the camera  
Portrait subjects framed against a dark  
background  
f
Night portrait  
Z
b
Auto  
Auto (flash off)  
Subjects suited to i or j mode or that do not  
fall into the categories listed above  
A Live View  
For more information on taking photographs in live view, see page  
142.  
34 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing Photographs  
Pressing K displays a picture in the monitor.  
K button  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures.  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Deleting Unwanted Pictures  
Display the photograph you wish to  
delete.  
K button  
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the  
picture.  
36 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.  
1
Press the a button.  
The view through the lens is displayed  
in the monitor.  
a button  
2
Ready the camera.  
Hold the handgrip in your right hand and cradle the camera  
body or lens with your left.  
3
Focus.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus.  
Focus point  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4
Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to start  
recording. A recording indicator and  
the time available are displayed in the  
monitor.  
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
Time remaining  
5
End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again  
to end recording. Press the a button  
to exit live view.  
A Recording Movies  
See page 155 for more information on recording movies.  
38 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Viewing Movies  
Press K to start playback and then scroll through pictures until  
a movie (indicated by a 1 icon) is displayed. Press J to start  
playback and press 1 or K to end playback. For more  
information, see page 162.  
K button  
“Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j) 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Deleting Unwanted Movies  
Display the movie you wish to delete  
(movies are indicated by 1 icons).  
K button  
Press O; a confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
O button  
Press the O button again to delete the  
movie.  
40 “Point-and-Shoot” Modes (i and j)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Guide Mode  
The Guide  
Guide mode gives access to a variety of  
frequently-used and useful functions. The top  
level of the guide is displayed when the mode  
dial is rotated to g.  
Battery indicator (0 21)  
Number of exposures remaining (0 19)  
Shooting mode: A guide mode indicator  
appears on the shooting mode icon.  
Choose from the following items:  
Shoot  
View/delete  
Take pictures.  
View and/or delete pictures.  
Retouch  
Set up  
Retouch pictures.  
Change camera settings.  
Guide Mode 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Guide Mode Menus  
To access these menus, highlight Shoot, View/delete, Retouch,  
or Set up and press J.  
❚❚ Shoot  
Easy operation  
Advanced operation  
4
5
9
!
8
9
7
6
"
Auto  
No flash  
Soften backgrounds  
#
Adjust aperture.  
Bring more into focus  
Freeze motion (people)  
Freeze motion (vehicles)  
Show water flowing  
Distant subjects  
Close-ups  
Sleeping faces  
Moving subjects  
Landscapes  
Portraits  
Night portrait  
Photograph night  
landscapes  
Select a shutter  
speed.  
$
Adjust white balance  
Capture reds in sunsets * to vividly capture the  
colors in sunsets.  
Take bright photos *  
Adjust exposure  
compensation to take  
bright (high key) or  
dark (low key) photos.  
5
Take dark (low key)  
photos *  
H
Adjust auto ISO  
sensitivity control for  
poorly lit subjects or  
Reduce blur  
telephoto lenses.  
* Affects other Advanced operation items. To restore default settings,  
turn the camera off and then on again.  
42 Guide Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
“Start Shooting”  
“More Settings”  
Highlight an option and press J.  
Use the viewfinder  
Use live view  
Shoot movies  
If More settings is displayed, you can  
highlight this option and press 2 to  
access the following settings (the settings  
available vary with the shooting option  
selected):  
Flash settings > Flash mode  
Flash settings > Flash compensation  
Release mode  
ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity  
ISO sensitivity settings >  
Auto ISO sensitivity control  
Set Picture Control  
Exposure compensation  
White balance  
❚❚ View/Delete  
View single photos  
View multiple photos  
Choose a date  
View a slide show  
Delete photos  
A Guide Mode  
Guide mode is reset to Easy operation > Auto when the mode dial is  
rotated to another setting or the camera is turned off.  
Guide Mode 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Retouch  
Trim  
Photo illustration  
Miniature effect  
Selective color  
Filter effects (cross screen)  
Filter effects (soft)  
❚❚ Set Up  
Image quality  
Playback folder  
Image size  
Auto off timers  
Print date  
Display and sound settings  
Monitor brightness  
Info background color  
Auto info display  
Beep  
Playback display options  
DPOF print order  
Clock and language  
Time zone and date  
Language  
Format memory card  
Output settings  
HDMI  
Movie settings  
Frame size/frame rate  
Movie quality  
Video mode  
Wireless mobile adapter  
Eye-Fi upload *  
Microphone  
Slot empty release lock  
Wind noise reduction  
Flicker reduction  
* Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted  
(0 261).  
Changes to Image quality, Image size, Auto off timers, Print  
date, Playback folder, Playback display options, all Display  
and sound settings options, and all Movie settings options  
except Flicker reduction apply in guide mode only and are not  
reflected in other shooting modes.  
44 Guide Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Guide  
The following operations can be performed while the guide is  
displayed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Return to top  
level of guide  
Press G to turn the monitor on or return  
to the top level of the guide.  
Turn monitor  
on  
G button  
Highlight a  
menu  
Press 1, 3, 4, or 2 to highlight a menu.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight options in the  
menus.  
Press 1, 3, 4, or 2 to highlight options in  
displays like that shown below.  
Highlight  
options  
Select  
highlighted  
menu or option  
Press J to select the highlighted menu or  
option.  
Guide Mode 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
To  
Use  
Description  
Press 4 to return to the previous display.  
To cancel and return to the previous display  
from displays like that shown below,  
highlight & and press J.  
Return to  
previous  
display  
If a d icon is displayed at the bottom left  
corner of the monitor, help can be  
displayed by pressing the W (Q) button. A  
description of the currently selected option  
will be displayed while the button is  
pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through the  
display.  
View help  
W (Q) button  
d (help) icon  
46 Guide Mode  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Matching Settings to the Subject or  
Situation (Scene Mode)  
The camera offers a choice of “scene” modes. Choosing a scene  
mode automatically optimizes settings to suit the selected  
scene, making creative photography as simple as selecting a  
mode, framing a picture, and shooting as described on page 25.  
The following scenes can be  
selected with the mode dial:  
Mode dial  
kPortrait  
Use for portraits with soft, natural-  
looking skin tones. If the subject is  
far from the background or a  
telephoto lens is used, background  
details will be softened to lend the  
composition a sense of depth.  
lLandscape  
Use for vivid landscape shots in  
daylight.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
pChild  
Use for snapshots of children.  
Clothing and background details are  
vividly rendered, while skin tones  
remain soft and natural.  
mSports  
Fast shutter speeds freeze motion  
for dynamic sports shots in which  
the main subject stands out clearly.  
A Note  
The built-in flash and AF-assist illuminator turn off.  
nClose up  
Use for close-up shots of flowers,  
insects, and other small objects (a  
macro lens can be used to focus at  
very close ranges).  
48 Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode)  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
oNight Portrait  
Use for a natural balance between  
the main subject and the  
background in portraits taken under  
low light.  
A Preventing Blur  
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter  
speeds.  
Matching Settings to the Subject or Situation (Scene Mode) 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Special Effects  
Special effects can be used when recording images.  
Night Vision  
Super Vivid  
Pop  
Photo Illustration  
Color Sketch  
Toy Camera Effect  
Miniature Effect  
Selective Color  
Silhouette  
High Key  
Low Key  
HDR Painting  
Easy Panorama  
%
S
3
1
2
3
)
I
T
U
g
'
(
The following effects can be selected by rotating the mode dial  
to q and rotating the command dial until the desired option  
appears in the monitor.  
Mode dial  
Command dial  
Monitor  
50 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
%Night Vision  
Use under conditions of darkness to  
record monochrome images at high  
ISO sensitivities.  
A Note  
Pictures may be affected by noise in the form of randomly-spaced bright  
pixels, fog, or lines. Autofocus is available in live view only; manual focus  
can be used if the camera is unable to focus. The built-in flash and AF-  
assist illuminator turn off.  
SSuper Vivid  
Overall saturation and contrast are  
increased for a more vibrant image.  
T Pop  
Overall saturation is increased for a  
more lively image.  
Special Effects 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
UPhoto Illustration  
Sharpen outlines and simplify  
coloring for a poster effect that can  
be adjusted in live view (0 56).  
A Note  
The flash turns off automatically; to use the flash, choose a flash mode  
(0 90) of No (auto) or Njo (auto + red-eye reduction). Movies  
shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series of stills.  
gColor Sketch  
The camera detects and colors  
outlines for a color sketch effect. The  
effect can be adjusted in live view  
(0 57).  
A Note  
Movies shot in this mode play back like a slide show made up of a series  
of stills.  
'Toy Camera Effect  
Create photos and movies that  
appear to have been shot with a toy  
camera. The effect can be adjusted  
in live view (0 58).  
52 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
(Miniature Effect  
Create photos that appear to be  
pictures of dioramas. Works best  
when shooting from a high vantage  
point. Miniature effect movies play  
back at high speed, compressing  
about 45 minutes of footage shot at  
1920 × 1080/30p into a movie that  
plays back in about three minutes.  
The effect can be adjusted in live  
view (0 59).  
A Note  
Sound is not recorded with movies. The built-in flash and AF-assist  
illuminator turn off.  
3Selective Color  
All colors other than the selected  
colors are recorded in black and  
white. The effect can be adjusted in  
live view (0 61).  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
Special Effects 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
1Silhouette  
Silhouette subjects against bright  
backgrounds.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
2High Key  
Use with bright scenes to create  
bright images that seem filled with  
light.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
3Low Key  
Use with dark scenes to create dark,  
low-key images with prominent  
highlights.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off.  
A Preventing Blur  
Use a tripod to prevent blur caused by camera shake at slow shutter  
speeds.  
54 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
)HDR Painting  
Each time a photo is taken, the  
camera shoots two frames at  
different exposures and combines  
them for a painterly effect that  
emphasizes detail and color.  
A Note  
The effect can not be previewed in live view. Note that the desired  
results may not be achieved if the camera or subject moves during  
shooting. During recording, a message is displayed and no further  
photos can be taken. The built-in flash turns off, continuous shooting is  
disabled, and movies are recorded in j mode.  
IEasy Panorama  
Shoot panoramas as described on  
page 63. Start live view before  
beginning recording; panoramas  
can not be shot during viewfinder  
photography.  
A Note  
The built-in flash turns off and movies can not be recorded.  
A NEF (RAW)  
NEF (RAW) recording is not available in %, S, T, U, g, ', (, 3, ), and  
I modes. Pictures taken when an NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine  
option is selected in these modes will be recorded as JPEG images.  
JPEG images created at these settings will be recorded as fine-quality  
images.  
A U, g, and ( Modes  
Autofocus is not available during movie recording. The live view  
refresh rate will drop, together with the frame rate for continuous  
release mode; using autofocus during live view photography will  
disrupt the preview.  
Special Effects 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Options Available in Live View  
❚❚ UPhoto Illustration  
1
Select live view.  
Press the a button. The view through  
the lens will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
a button  
2
Adjust outline thickness.  
Press J to display the  
options shown at right.  
Press 2 or 4 to make  
outlines thicker or thinner.  
3
Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view,  
press the a button. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the  
viewfinder.  
56 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ gColor Sketch  
1
Select live view.  
Press the abutton. The view through  
the lens will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
a button  
2
Adjust options.  
Press J to display the  
options shown at right.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
Vividness or Outlines and  
press 4 or 2 to change.  
Vividness can be increased  
to make colors more  
saturated, or decreased for  
a washed-out,  
monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or  
thinner. Increasing the thickness of the lines also makes  
colors more saturated.  
3
Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view,  
press the a button. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the  
viewfinder.  
Special Effects 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ ' Toy Camera Effect  
1
Select live view.  
Press the abutton. The view through  
the lens will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
a button  
2
Adjust options.  
Press J to display the  
options shown at right.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
Vividness or Vignetting  
and press 4or 2to change.  
Adjust vividness to make  
colors more or less  
saturated, vignetting to  
control the amount of  
vignetting.  
3
Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view,  
press the a button. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the  
viewfinder.  
58 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ (Miniature Effect  
1
Select live view.  
Press the abutton. The view through  
the lens will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
a button  
2
Position the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to  
position the focus point in  
the area that will be in focus  
and then press the shutter-  
release button halfway to  
focus. To temporarily clear  
miniature effect options from the display and enlarge the  
view in the monitor for precise focus, press X. Press W (Q) to  
restore the miniature effect display.  
3
Display options.  
Press J to display  
miniature effect options.  
Special Effects 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Adjust options.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the  
orientation of the area that  
will be in focus and press 1  
or 3 to adjust its width.  
Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. To exit live view,  
press the a button. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the  
viewfinder.  
60 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ 3 Selective Color  
1
Select live view.  
Press the abutton. The view through  
the lens will be displayed in the  
monitor.  
a button  
2
3
Display options.  
Press J to display selective  
color options.  
Select a color.  
Selected color  
Frame an object in the  
white square in the center  
of the display and press 1  
to choose the color of the  
object as one that will  
remain in the final image  
(the camera may have  
difficulty detecting unsaturated colors; choose a saturated  
color). To zoom in on the center of the display for more  
precise color selection, press X. Press W (Q) to zoom out.  
Special Effects 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Choose the color range.  
Press 1 or 3 to increase or  
decrease the range of  
similar hues that will be  
included in the final image.  
Choose from values  
between 1 and 7; note that  
higher values may include  
hues from other colors.  
Color range  
Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors,  
rotate the command dial to  
highlight another of the  
three color boxes at the top  
of the display and repeat  
Steps 3 and 4 to select  
another color. Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect  
the highlighted color, press O (To remove all colors, press and  
hold O. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).  
6
Press J.  
Press J to exit when settings are complete. During shooting,  
only objects of the selected hues will be recorded in color; all  
others will be recorded in black-and-white. To exit live view,  
press the a button. The selected settings will continue in  
effect and will apply to photographs taken using the  
viewfinder.  
62 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
I Easy Panorama  
Follow the steps below to shoot panoramas.  
1
Select live view.  
Press the a button. A framing grid  
and the view through the lens will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
a button  
2
3
Focus.  
Frame the start of the  
panorama and press the  
shutter-release button  
halfway.  
Start shooting.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down and then lift your  
finger from the button. The  
display will briefly go dark  
and then turn on with 4, 6,  
7, and 5 icons indicating the  
possible pan directions; focus and exposure will lock.  
Special Effects 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Pan the camera.  
Progress indicator  
Slowly pan the camera up, down, left,  
or right as shown below. Shooting will  
start when the camera detects the  
pan direction and a progress indicator  
will appear in the display. Shooting  
ends automatically when the end of  
the panorama is reached.  
An example of how to pan the camera is shown below.  
Without changing your position, pan the camera in a steady  
curve either horizontally or vertically. Time the pan according  
to the option selected for Image size in the shooting menu:  
about 15 seconds are needed to complete the pan when  
Normal panorama is selected, about 30 seconds when Wide  
panorama is selected.  
64 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Panoramas  
Panorama size can be selected using the Image size item in the  
shooting menu; choose from Normal panorama and Wide panorama  
(0 88). An error message will be displayed if the camera is panned too  
quickly or unsteadily. Note that because panoramas are composed of  
multiple images, the joins between images may be visible and the  
desired results may not be achieved with moving subjects or with  
neon lights or other subjects that exhibit rapid changes in color or  
brightness, subjects that are too close to the camera, poorly-lit  
subjects, and subjects such as the sky or sea that are a solid color or  
contain simple repeating patterns.  
Exposure compensation (0 118) can be used to adjust exposure by up  
to 3 EV in steps of 1  
3 EV. Adjust exposure compensation after starting  
/
live view in Step 1.  
The completed panorama will be slightly smaller than the area visible  
in the display during shooting. No panorama will be recorded if  
shooting ends before the halfway point; if shooting ends after the  
halfway point but before the panorama is complete, the unrecorded  
portion will be shown in gray. Dates can not be imprinted on  
panoramas (0 254).  
Special Effects 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Viewing Panoramas  
To view a panorama, display it in full-frame playback (0 170)  
and press J. The start of the panorama will be displayed with  
the smallest dimension filling the display and the camera will  
then scroll through the picture in the original pan direction. Your  
current position is indicated by the navigation window.  
Navigation window Guide  
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
Pause playback.  
Resume playback when the panorama  
is paused or during rewind/advance.  
Press 4 to rewind, 2 to advance. If  
playback is paused, the panorama  
rewinds or advances a segment at a  
time; keep the button pressed for  
continuous rewind or advance.  
Play  
J
Advance/rewind  
Return to full-frame  
playback  
Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame  
playback.  
/K  
66 Special Effects  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
More on Photography  
Choosing a Release Mode  
To choose how the shutter is released  
(release mode), press the I (E/#)  
button, then highlight the desired option  
and press J.  
I (E/#) button  
Mode  
Description  
Single frame: Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-  
release button is pressed.  
8
Continuous: The camera takes photographs while the shutter-  
release button is pressed (0 68).  
I
Quiet shutter release: As for single-frame, except that camera noise  
is reduced (0 70).  
J
E
Self-timer: Take pictures with the self-timer (0 71).  
Delayed remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released 2 s after shutter-release  
button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed (0 97).  
Quick-response remote (ML-L3): Shutter is released when shutter-  
release button on optional ML-L3 remote control is pressed  
(0 97).  
"
#
More on Photography 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Continuous Shooting (Burst Mode)  
In I (Continuous) mode, the camera takes photographs  
continuously while the shutter-release button is pressed all the  
way down.  
1
Press the I (E/#) button.  
I (E/#) button  
2
Choose I (Continuous).  
Highlight I (Continuous)  
and press J.  
3
4
Focus.  
Frame the shot and focus.  
Take photographs.  
The camera will take photographs  
while the shutter-release button is  
pressed all the way down.  
68 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,  
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to  
the memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession.  
Depending on the battery level and the number of images in the  
buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. If the  
battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer, the shutter  
release will be disabled and the images transferred to the memory  
card.  
A Frame Rate  
For information on the number of photographs that can be taken in  
continuous release mode, see page 344. Frame rates may drop when  
the memory buffer is full or the battery is low.  
A The Built-in Flash  
Continuous release mode can not be used with the built-in flash; rotate  
the mode dial to j (0 25) or turn the flash off (0 89).  
A Buffer Size  
The approximate number of images that  
can be stored in the memory buffer at  
current settings is shown in the viewfinder exposure-count display  
while the shutter-release button is pressed.  
More on Photography 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Quiet Shutter Release  
Choose this mode to keep camera noise to a minimum. A beep  
does not sound when the camera focuses.  
1
Press the I (E/#) button.  
I (E/#) button  
2
3
Select J (Quiet shutter  
release).  
Highlight J (Quiet shutter  
release) and press J.  
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way down.  
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way down to shoot.  
70 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Self-Timer Mode  
The self-timer can be used for self-portraits or group shots that  
include the photographer. Before proceeding, mount the  
camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level surface.  
1
Press the I (E/#) button.  
I (E/#) button  
2
3
Select E (Self-timer)  
mode.  
Highlight E (Self-timer)  
and press J.  
Frame the photograph.  
More on Photography 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
Take the photograph.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus,  
and then press the button  
the rest of the way down.  
The self-timer lamp will  
start to flash and a beep will  
begin to sound. Two seconds before the photo is taken, the  
lamp will stop flashing and the beeping will become more  
rapid. The shutter will be released ten seconds after the timer  
starts.  
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be  
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in  
which the shutter can not be released. To stop the timer  
without taking a photograph, turn the camera off.  
72 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Cover the Viewfinder  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the  
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you  
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an  
optional eyepiece cap (0 307) when taking pictures without your eye  
to the viewfinder. To attach the cap, remove the rubber eyecup (q)  
and insert the cap as shown (w).  
Rubber eyecup  
Eyepiece cap  
A Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in modes that require the  
flash to be raised manually, press the M (Y) button to raise the flash  
and wait for the M indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 31).  
Shooting will be interrupted if the flash is raised after the self-timer has  
started.  
A The Setup Menu Self-Timer Option  
For information on choosing the duration of the self-timer and the  
number of shots taken, see the Self-timer option in the setup menu  
(0 246).  
More on Photography 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Focus (Viewfinder Photography)  
This section describes the focus options available when  
photographs are framed in the viewfinder. Focus can be  
adjusted automatically or manually (see “Choosing How the  
Camera Focuses: Focus Mode,below). The user can also select  
the focus point for automatic or manual focus (0 80) or use  
focus lock to focus to recompose photographs after focusing  
(0 81).  
Choosing How the Camera Focuses: Focus Mode  
Choose from the following focus modes. Note that AF-S and AF-C  
are available only in modes P, S, A, and M.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically selects single-servo  
autofocus if subject is stationary, continuous-  
servo autofocus if subject is moving. Shutter  
can only be released if camera is able to focus.  
For stationary subjects. Focus locks when  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
Shutter can only be released if camera is able  
to focus.  
AF-A Auto-servo AF  
AF-S Single-servo AF  
For moving subjects. Camera focuses  
continuously while shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway. Shutter can only be released  
if camera is able to focus.  
Continuous-  
AF-C  
servo AF  
MF Manual focus  
Focus manually (0 83).  
74 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1
2
Display focus mode  
options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current focus  
mode in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Choose a focus mode.  
Highlight a focus mode and  
press J.  
A Predictive Focus Tracking  
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A  
mode, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject  
moves toward the camera while the shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. This allows the camera to track focus while attempting to  
predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released.  
D Continuous-Servo Autofocus  
In AF-C mode or when continuous-servo autofocus is selected in AF-A  
mode, the camera gives higher priority to focus response (has a wider  
focus range) than in AF-S mode, and the shutter may be released before  
the in-focus indicator is displayed.  
More on Photography 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below.  
The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable to focus  
under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (I) may be displayed  
and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the shutter to be released  
even when the subject is not in focus. In these cases, focus manually  
(0 83) or use focus lock (0 81) to focus on another subject at the same  
distance and then recompose the photograph.  
There is little or no contrast between The focus point contains areas of  
the subject and the background.  
sharply contrasting brightness.  
Example: Subject  
is the same  
color as the  
Example: Subject  
is half in the  
shade.  
background.  
The focus point contains objects at Background objects appear larger  
different distances from the camera. than the subject.  
Example: Subject  
Example: A  
is inside a cage.  
building is in the  
frame behind  
the subject.  
The subject is dominated by regular The subject contains many fine  
geometric patterns.  
details.  
Example: Blinds  
or a row of  
Example: A field  
of flowers or  
windows in a  
skyscraper.  
other subjects  
that are small or  
lack variation in  
brightness.  
76 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A The AF-Assist Illuminator  
If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist  
illuminator will light automatically to assist  
the autofocus operation when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway (some  
restrictions apply; 0 331). Note that the  
illuminator may become hot when used  
multiple times in quick succession and will  
turn off automatically to protect the lamp  
after a period of continuous use. Normal  
function will resume after a brief pause.  
AF-assist illuminator  
More on Photography 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Choosing How the Focus Point Is Selected:  
AF-Area Mode  
Choose how the focus point for autofocus is selected. Note that  
d (Dynamic-area AF) and f (3D-tracking (11 points)) AF-  
area modes are not available when AF-S is selected for focus  
mode.  
Option  
Description  
For stationary subjects. Focus point is selected  
manually; camera focuses on subject in selected  
focus point only.  
Single-point  
AF  
c
d
For non-stationary subjects. In AF-A and AF-C focus  
modes, user selects focus point using multi  
selector (0 80), but camera will focus based on  
information from surrounding focus points if  
subject briefly leaves selected point.  
In AF-A and AF-C focus modes, user selects focus point  
using multi selector (0 80). If subject moves  
after camera has focused, camera uses 3D-  
tracking to select new focus point and keep  
focus locked on original subject while shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway.  
Dynamic-area  
AF  
3D-tracking  
(11 points)  
f
e
Camera automatically detects subject and  
selects focus point.  
Auto-area AF  
78 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
1
2
Display AF-area mode  
options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current AF-  
area mode in the  
information display and  
press J.  
P button  
Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
A AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode selections made in shooting modes other than P, S, A, or  
M are reset when another shooting mode is selected.  
A 3D-Tracking (11 Points)  
If subject leaves the viewfinder, remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button and recompose the photograph with the subject in the  
selected focus point. Note that when the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway, the colors in the area surrounding the focus point are  
stored in the camera. Consequently 3D-tracking may not produce the  
desired results with subjects that are the same color as the  
background.  
More on Photography 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Focus Point Selection  
In manual focus mode or when autofocus is combined with AF-  
area modes other than e (Auto-area AF), you can choose from  
11 focus points, making it possible to compose photographs  
with the main subject almost anywhere in the frame.  
1
Choose an AF-area mode other than  
e (Auto-area AF; 0 78).  
2
Return to the shooting display.  
Press P to return to the shooting  
display.  
P button  
3
Select the focus point.  
Use the multi selector to  
select the focus point in the  
viewfinder or information  
display while the exposure  
meters are on. Press J to  
select the center focus  
point.  
Focus point  
80 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing  
in AF-A, AF-S, and AF-C focus modes (0 74), making it possible to  
focus on a subject that will not be in a focus point in the final  
composition. If the camera is unable to focus using autofocus  
(0 76), focus lock can also be used to recompose the  
photograph after focusing on another object at the same  
distance as your original subject. Focus lock is most effective  
when an option other than e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-  
area mode (0 78).  
1
Focus.  
Position the subject in the  
selected focus point and  
press the shutter-release  
button halfway to initiate  
focus. Check that the in-  
focus indicator (I) appears  
in the viewfinder.  
2
Lock focus.  
AF-A and AF-C focus modes: With the  
shutter-release button pressed  
halfway (q), press the A (L) button  
(w) to lock focus. Focus will remain  
locked while the A (L) button is  
pressed, even if you later remove your  
finger from the shutter-release  
button.  
Shutter-release button  
A (L) button  
More on Photography 81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
AF-S focus mode: Focus will lock automatically when the in-focus  
indicator appears, and remain locked until you remove your  
finger from the shutter-release button. Focus can also be  
locked by pressing the A (L) button (see above).  
3
Recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
Focus will remain locked  
between shots if you keep  
the shutter-release button  
pressed halfway (AF-S) or  
keep the A (L) button  
pressed, allowing several photographs in succession to be  
taken at the same focus setting.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the  
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves,  
focus again at the new distance.  
A Autoexposure Lock  
Pressing the A (L) button in Step 2 also locks exposure (0 116).  
82 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manual Focus  
Manual focus can be used when autofocus is not available or  
does not produce the desired results (0 76).  
1
Set the lens focus-mode switch.  
If the lens is equipped with an A-M, M/A-M, or A/M-M mode  
switch, slide the switch to M.  
A-M mode switch  
M/A-M mode switch  
2
Focus.  
To focus manually, adjust the lens  
focus ring until the image displayed  
on the clear matte field in the  
viewfinder is in focus. Photographs  
can be taken at any time, even when  
the image is not in focus.  
More on Photography 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
❚❚ The Electronic Rangefinder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of  
f/5.6 or faster, the viewfinder focus  
indicator can be used to confirm whether  
the subject in the selected focus point is  
in focus (the focus point can be selected  
from any of the 11 focus points). After  
positioning the subject in the selected  
focus point, press the shutter-release button halfway and rotate  
the lens focus ring until the in-focus indicator (I) is displayed.  
Note that with the subjects listed on page 76, the in-focus  
indicator may sometimes be displayed when the subject is not in  
focus; confirm focus in the viewfinder before shooting.  
A Selecting Manual Focus with the Camera  
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with  
manual override) or A/M (autofocus with  
manual override/AF priority), manual focus  
can also be selected by setting the camera  
focus mode to MF (manual focus; 0 74).  
Focus can then be adjusted manually,  
regardless of the mode selected with the  
lens.  
A Focal Plane Position  
The position of the focal plane is indicated  
by the focal plane mark on the camera body.  
The distance between the lens mounting  
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm  
(1.83 in.).  
46.5mm  
Focal plane mark  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84 More on Photography  
       
Image Quality and Size  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space  
each photograph occupies on the memory card. Larger, higher  
quality images can be printed at larger sizes but also require  
more memory, meaning that fewer such images can be stored  
on the memory card (0 362).  
Image Quality  
Choose a file format and compression ratio (image quality).  
Option  
NEF (RAW) +  
JPEG fine  
File type  
Description  
Two images are recorded: one NEF (RAW) image  
and one fine-quality JPEG image.  
NEF/JPEG  
Raw 12-bit data from the image sensor are saved  
directly to the memory card. Settings such as  
white balance and contrast can be adjusted after  
shooting.  
NEF (RAW)  
NEF  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1 : 4 (fine quality).  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1 : 8 (normal quality).  
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of  
roughly 1 : 16 (basic quality).  
JPEG fine  
JPEG normal  
JPEG basic  
JPEG  
More on Photography 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
1
2
Display image quality  
options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current image  
quality in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
Choose a file type.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
A NEF (RAW) Images  
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of  
NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG images. Print date (0 254) is not  
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG.  
NEF (RAW) images can be viewed on the camera or using software  
such as Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 307) or ViewNX 2  
(supplied). JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the  
NEF (RAW) processing option in the retouch menu (0 275).  
A NEF (RAW) + JPEG  
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine are viewed on the  
camera, only the JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs  
taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be  
deleted.  
86 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Image Size  
Choose a size for JPEG images:  
Image size  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Size (pixels)  
Print size (cm/in.) *  
50.8 × 33.9/20 × 13.3  
38.1 × 25.4/15.0 × 10  
25.3 × 16.9/10 × 6.7  
#
$
%
6000 × 4000  
4496 × 3000  
2992 × 2000  
* Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals  
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;  
1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).  
1
Display image size options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current image  
size in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
2
Choose an image size.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
More on Photography 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Easy Panorama  
The following options are available in I mode (0 63).  
Image size  
Normal  
panorama  
Size (pixels) *  
Camera panned horizontally: 4800 × 1080 40.6 × 9.1/16.0 × 3.6  
Camera panned vertically: 1632 × 4800 13.8 × 40.6/5.4 × 16.0  
Camera panned horizontally: 9600 × 1080 81.3 × 9.1/32.0 × 3.6  
Camera panned vertically: 1632 × 9600 13.8 × 81.3/5.4 × 32.0  
Print size (cm/in.) †  
Wide panorama  
* Figures for horizontal and vertical panorama are reversed if camera is  
rotated 90 degrees.  
Approximate size when printed at 300 dpi. Print size in inches equals  
image size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;  
1 inch=approximately 2.54 cm).  
88 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Using the Built-in Flash  
The camera supports a variety of flash modes for photographing  
poorly lit or backlit subjects.  
Auto Pop-up Modes  
In i, k, p, n, o, S, T, U, g, and ' modes, the built-in flash  
automatically pops up and fires as required.  
1
Choose a flash mode.  
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial  
until the desired flash mode appears in the information  
display.  
+
Command dial  
Information display  
M (Y) button  
2
Take pictures.  
The flash will pop up as  
required when the shutter-  
release button is pressed  
halfway, and fire when a  
photograph is taken. If the  
flash does not pop up  
automatically, DO NOT attempt to raise it by hand. Failure to  
observe this precaution could damage the flash.  
More on Photography 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
❚❚ Flash Modes  
The following flash modes are available:  
No (auto): When lighting is poor or the subject is backlit,  
the flash pops up automatically when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway and fires as required. Not available  
in o mode.  
Njo (auto + red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The  
flash pops up and fires as required, but before it fires the red-  
eye reduction lamp lights to help reduce “red-eye.” Not  
available in o mode.  
j (flash off): The flash does not fire.  
Njr (auto slow sync + red-eye): As for auto with red-eye  
reduction, except that slow shutter speeds are used to  
capture background lighting. Use for portraits taken at night  
or under low light. Available in o mode.  
Nr (auto slow sync): Slow shutter speeds are used to  
capture background lighting in shots taken at night or under  
low light. Available in o mode.  
A The Information Display  
Flash mode can also be selected in the  
information display.  
90 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Manual Pop-up Modes  
In P, S, A, M modes, the flash must be raised manually. The flash  
will not fire if it is not raised.  
1
Raise the flash.  
Press the M (Y) button to raise the  
flash.  
M (Y) button  
2
Choose a flash mode.  
Keeping the M (Y) button pressed, rotate the command dial  
until the desired flash mode appears in the information  
display.  
+
Command dial  
Information display  
M (Y) button  
3
Take pictures.  
The flash will fire whenever a picture is taken.  
More on Photography 91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ Flash Modes  
The following flash modes are available:  
N (fill flash): The flash fires with every shot.  
Nj (red-eye reduction): Use for portraits. The flash fires with  
every shot, but before it fires, the red-eye reduction lamp  
lights to help reduce “red-eye.”  
Njp (slow sync + red-eye): As for “red-eye reduction”,  
above, except that shutter speed slows automatically to  
capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use  
when you want to include background lighting in portraits.  
Not available in modes S and M.  
Np (slow sync): As for “fill flash”, above, except that  
shutter speed slows automatically to capture background  
lighting at night or under low light. Use when you want to  
capture both subject and background. Not available in  
modes S and M.  
Nt (rear curtain + slow sync): As for “rear-curtain sync”,  
below, except that shutter speed slows automatically to  
capture background lighting at night or under low light. Use  
when you want to capture both subject and background. Not  
available in modes S and M.  
Nq (rear-curtain sync): The flash fires just before the  
shutter closes, creating a stream of light behind moving light  
sources as shown below at right. Not available in modes  
P and A.  
Front-curtain sync  
Rear-curtain sync  
92 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
A Lowering the Built-in Flash  
To save power when the flash is not in use,  
press it gently downward until the latch  
clicks into place.  
A The Built-in Flash  
For information on the lenses that can be used with the built-in flash,  
see page 295. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a  
minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft) and can not be used in the macro range  
of zoom lenses with a macro function.  
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it  
has been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used  
again after a short pause.  
A Shutter Speeds Available with the Built-in Flash  
Shutter speed is restricted to the following ranges when the built-in  
flash is used:  
Mode  
i, k, p, n, S,  
T, U, g, ', P, A  
o
Shutter speed  
Mode  
Shutter speed  
1
1
/
2001  
/
60 s  
S
/
200–30 s  
1
1
/
200–1 s  
M
/
200–30 s, Bulb, Time  
Shutter speeds as slow as 1  
30 s are available in mode k when vibration  
/
reduction (0 355) is on. Shutter speeds as slow as 30 s are available  
in modes P and A when slow sync, rear curtain + slow sync, or slow  
sync + red-eye reduction is selected.  
More on Photography 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range  
Flash range varies with sensitivity (ISO equivalency) and aperture.  
Aperture at ISO equivalent of  
100 200 400 800 1600 3200 6400 12800  
Approximate range  
m ft  
1.4  
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
2
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
2.8  
4
5.6  
8
4
5.6  
8
5.6  
8
11  
8
11  
16  
22  
16  
22  
32  
1.0–8.5  
0.7–6.0  
0.6–4.2  
0.6–3.0  
0.6–2.1  
0.6–1.5  
0.6–1.1  
0.6–0.7  
3 ft 3in.–27 ft 11 in.  
2 ft 4in.–19 ft 8 in.  
2 ft–13 ft 9 in.  
2 ft–9 ft 10 in.  
2 ft–6 ft 11 in.  
2 ft–4 ft 11 in.  
2 ft–3 ft 7 in.  
11  
16  
22  
32  
11 16  
32  
11 16 22  
11 16 22 32  
11 16 22 32  
16 22 32  
2 ft–2 ft 4 in.  
94 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ISO Sensitivity  
The camera’s sensitivity to light can be adjusted according to the  
amount of light available. The higher the ISO sensitivity, the less  
light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter  
speeds or smaller apertures. Noise (randomly-spaced bright  
pixels, fog, or lines) is however more likely at a setting of Hi 1,  
which is equivalent to ISO 25600). Choosing Auto allows the  
camera to set ISO sensitivity automatically in response to  
lighting conditions; to use auto in P, S, A, and M modes, select  
Auto ISO sensitivity control for the ISO sensitivity settings  
item in the shooting menu (0 227).  
Mode  
i, j, %, I  
P, S, A, M  
ISO sensitivity  
Auto  
100–12800 in steps of 1 EV; Hi 1  
Other shooting modes  
Auto; 100–12800 in steps of 1 EV; Hi 1  
1
Display ISO sensitivity  
options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current ISO  
sensitivity in the  
information display and  
press J.  
P button  
More on Photography 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Choose an ISO sensitivity.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
96 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Remote Control Photography  
Using an Optional ML-L3 Remote Control  
The optional ML-L3 remote control (0 308) can be used to  
reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. Before proceeding,  
mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level  
surface.  
1
Press the I (E/#) button.  
I (E/#) button  
2
Select a remote control  
mode.  
Highlight " (Delayed  
remote (ML-L3)) or  
# (Quick-response remote  
(ML-L3)) and press J.  
More on Photography 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
4
Frame the photograph.  
Check focus by pressing the shutter-  
release button halfway.  
Take the photograph.  
From a distance of 5 m (16 ft) or less,  
aim the transmitter on the ML-L3 at  
either of the infrared receivers on the  
camera (0 1, 2) and press the ML-L3  
shutter-release button. In delayed  
remote mode, the self-timer lamp will  
light for about two seconds before the  
shutter is released. In quick-response remote mode, the self-  
timer lamp will flash after the shutter has been released.  
Note that the timer may not start or a photograph may not be  
taken if the camera is unable to focus or in other situations in  
which the shutter can not be released.  
A Before Using the ML-L3 Remote Control  
Before using the ML-L3 for the first time, remove the clear plastic  
battery-insulator sheet.  
A Cover the Viewfinder  
To prevent light entering via the viewfinder from appearing in the  
photograph or interfering with exposure, we recommend that you  
cover the viewfinder with your hand or other objects such as an  
optional eyepiece cap (0 307) before taking pictures without your eye  
to the viewfinder (0 73).  
98 More on Photography  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A The Camera Shutter-Release Button/Other Remote Control Devices  
If an ML-L3 remote release mode is selected and the shutter is released  
by any means other than an ML-L3 remote control (for example, the  
camera shutter-release button or the shutter button on an optional  
remote cord or wireless remote controller), the camera will function in  
single-frame release mode.  
A Exiting Remote Control Mode  
Remote control mode is cancelled automatically if no photograph is  
taken before the time selected for Remote on duration (ML-L3)  
option in the setup menu (0 247). Remote control mode will also be  
cancelled if the camera is turned off or shooting options are reset using  
Reset shooting menu.  
A Using the Built-in Flash  
Before taking a photograph with the flash in manual pop-up modes  
(0 91), press the M (Y) button to raise the flash and wait for the M  
indicator to be displayed in the viewfinder (0 31). Shooting will be  
interrupted if the flash is raised after the shutter-release button on the  
ML-L3 is pressed. If the flash is required, the camera will only respond  
to the ML-L3 shutter-release button once the flash has charged. In  
auto pop-up modes, the flash will begin charging when a remote  
control mode is selected; once the flash is charged, it will automatically  
pop up and fire when required.  
A Wireless Remote Controllers  
Remote control is also available with various combinations of WR-R10,  
WR-T10, and WR-1 wireless remote controllers (0 308), when the  
shutter-release buttons on the wireless remote controllers perform the  
same functions as the camera shutter-release button. For more  
information, see the manual provided with the remote controllers.  
More on Photography 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
P, S, A, and M Modes  
Shutter Speed and Aperture  
P, S, A, and M modes offer different degrees of  
control over shutter speed and aperture:  
Mode  
Description  
Recommended for snapshots and in other  
situations in which there is little time to  
adjust camera settings. Camera sets shutter  
speed and aperture for optimal exposure.  
Use to freeze or blur motion. User chooses  
shutter speed; camera selects aperture for  
best results.  
Programmed auto  
(0 102)  
P
S
Shutter-priority auto  
(0 104)  
Use to blur background or bring both  
foreground and background into focus. User  
chooses aperture; camera selects shutter  
speed for best results.  
Aperture-priority  
auto  
(0 106)  
A
User controls both shutter speed and  
aperture. Set shutter speed to “Bulb” or  
“Time” for long time-exposures.  
M
Manual (0 108)  
100 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
A Shutter Speed and Aperture  
Shutter speed and aperture are shown in the viewfinder and  
information display.  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Fast shutter speeds (1  
/
1600 s in this  
Slow shutter speeds (here 1 s) blur  
motion.  
example) freeze motion.  
Large apertures (such as f/5.6;  
remember, the lower the f-number,  
the larger the aperture) blur details  
in front of and behind the main  
subject.  
Small apertures (f/22 in this case)  
bring both background and  
foreground into focus.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mode P (Programmed Auto)  
This mode is recommended  
for snapshots or whenever  
you want to leave the camera  
in charge of shutter speed and  
aperture. The camera  
Mode dial  
automatically adjusts shutter  
speed and aperture for  
optimal exposure in most  
situations.  
To take pictures in programmed auto mode, rotate the mode  
dial to P.  
102 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Flexible Program  
In mode P, different combinations of shutter speed and aperture can  
be selected by rotating the command dial (“flexible program”). Rotate  
the dial right for large apertures (low f-numbers) and fast shutter  
speeds, left for small apertures (high f-numbers) and slow shutter  
speeds. All combinations produce the same exposure.  
Rotate right to blur background details or  
freeze motion.  
Command dial  
Rotate left to increase depth of field or blur  
motion.  
While flexible program is in effect, a U (R)  
indicator appears in the viewfinder and  
information display. To restore default  
shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate  
the command dial until the indicator is no  
longer displayed, choose another mode, or  
turn the camera off.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Mode S (Shutter-Priority Auto)  
This mode lets you control shutter speed: choose fast shutter  
speeds to “freeze” motion, slow shutter speeds to suggest  
motion by blurring moving objects. The camera automatically  
adjusts aperture for optimal exposure.  
Fast shutter speeds (e.g., 1  
freeze motion.  
/1600 s)  
Slow shutter speeds (e.g., 1 s) blur  
motion.  
To choose a shutter speed:  
Rotate the mode dial to S.  
1
Mode dial  
104 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Choose a shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial to choose  
the desired shutter speed: rotate right  
for faster speeds, left for slower  
speeds.  
Command dial  
P, S, A, and M Modes 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mode A (Aperture-Priority Auto)  
In this mode, you can adjust aperture to control depth of field  
(the distance in front of and behind the main subject that  
appears to be in focus). The camera automatically adjusts  
shutter speed for optimal exposure.  
Large apertures (low f-numbers, e.g. Small apertures (high f-numbers, e.g.  
f/5.6) blur details in front of and  
behind the main subject.  
f/22) bring the foreground and  
background into focus.  
To choose an aperture:  
1
Rotate the mode dial to A.  
Mode dial  
106 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Choose an aperture.  
Rotate the command dial left for  
larger apertures (lower f-numbers),  
right for smaller apertures (higher f-  
numbers).  
Command dial  
P, S, A, and M Modes 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mode M (Manual)  
In manual mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.  
Shutter speeds of “Bulb” and “Time” are available for long time-  
exposures of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or fireworks  
(0 110).  
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.  
Mode dial  
108 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Choose aperture and shutter speed.  
Checking the exposure indicator (see below), adjust shutter  
speed and aperture. Shutter speed is selected by rotating the  
command dial (right for faster speeds, left for slower). To  
adjust aperture, keep the E (N) button pressed while  
rotating the command dial (left for larger apertures/lower  
f-numbers and right for smaller apertures/higher f-numbers).  
Shutter speed  
Command dial  
Aperture  
E (N) button  
Command dial  
A The Exposure Indicator  
If a CPU lens is attached (0 289) and a shutter speed other than “Bulb”  
or “Time” is selected, the exposure indicator in the viewfinder and  
information display shows whether the photograph would be under-  
or over-exposed at current settings.  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1  
3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV  
/
P, S, A, and M Modes 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Long Time-Exposures (M Mode Only)  
Select the following shutter speeds for  
long time-exposures of moving lights,  
the stars, night scenery, or fireworks.  
Bulb (A): The shutter remains open  
while the shutter-release button is  
pressed all the way down. To prevent  
blur, use a tripod or an optional  
wireless remote controller (0 308) or  
remote cord (0 309).  
Length of exposure: 35 s  
Aperture: f/25  
Time (&): Start the exposure using the shutter-release button  
on the camera or on an optional remote control, remote cord,  
or wireless remote controller. The shutter remains open for  
thirty minutes or until the button is pressed a second time.  
Before proceeding, mount the camera on a tripod or place it on  
a stable, level surface. To prevent light entering via the  
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or interfering with  
exposure, we recommend that you cover the viewfinder with  
your hand or other objects such as an optional eyepiece cap  
(0 307) before taking pictures without your eye to the  
viewfinder (0 73). To prevent loss of power before the exposure  
is complete, use a fully charged battery. Note that noise (bright  
spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be present in  
long exposures; before shooting, choose On for Noise  
reduction in the shooting menu (0 226).  
110 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
❚❚ Bulb  
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.  
Mode dial  
2
Choose the shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial to choose a  
shutter speed of Bulb (A).  
Command dial  
3
Take the photograph.  
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the  
camera, optional wireless remote controller or remote cord  
all the way down. Take your finger from the shutter-release  
button when the exposure is complete.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Time  
1
Rotate the mode dial to M.  
Mode dial  
2
Choose the shutter speed.  
Rotate the command dial left to  
choose a shutter speed of “Time” (&).  
Command dial  
3
Open the shutter.  
After focusing, press the shutter-release button on the  
camera or optional remote control, remote cord, or wireless  
remote controller all the way down.  
112 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4
Close the shutter.  
Repeat the operation performed in Step 3 (shooting ends  
automatically if the button is not pressed after 30 minutes).  
A ML-L3 Remote Controls  
If you will be using an ML-L3 remote control, select one of the  
following remote control modes as described on page 97: "  
(Delayed remote (ML-L3)) or # (Quick-response remote (ML-L3)).  
Note that if you are using an ML-L3 remote control, pictures will be  
taken in “Time” mode even when “Bulb”/A is selected for shutter  
speed.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure  
Metering  
Choose how the camera sets exposure.  
Method  
Description  
Produces natural results in most situations. The  
camera meters a wide area of the frame and sets  
exposure according to tone distribution, color,  
composition, and distance.  
L
M
N
Matrix metering  
Classic meter for portraits. Camera meters entire  
Center-weighted frame but assigns greatest weight to center area.  
metering  
Recommended when using filters with an  
exposure factor (filter factor) over 1×.  
Choose this mode to ensure that subject will be  
correctly exposed, even when background is  
much brighter or darker. Camera meters current  
focus point; use to meter off-center subjects.  
Spot metering  
114 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1
2
Display metering options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current  
metering method in the  
information display and  
press J.  
P button  
Choose a metering  
method.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
A Spot Metering  
If e (Auto-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode during viewfinder  
photography (0 78), the camera will meter the center focus point.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Autoexposure Lock  
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after using  
M (Center-weighted metering) and N (Spot metering) to  
meter exposure; note that autoexposure lock is not available in  
i or j mode.  
1
Meter exposure.  
Press the shutter-release  
button halfway.  
2
Lock exposure.  
Shutter-release button  
With the shutter-release button  
pressed halfway (q) and the subject  
positioned in the focus point, press  
the A (L) button (w) to lock  
exposure.  
A (L) button  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L  
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.  
116 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Recompose the  
photograph.  
Keeping the A (L) button  
pressed, recompose the  
photograph and shoot.  
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be adjusted  
without altering the metered value for exposure:  
Mode  
Setting  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program;  
0 103)  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
The metering method itself can not be changed while exposure lock is  
in effect.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Exposure Compensation  
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value  
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker  
(0 345). It is most effective when used with M (Center-  
weighted metering) or N (Spot metering) (0 114).  
–1 EV  
No exposure  
+1 EV  
compensation  
118 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
To choose a value for exposure compensation, keep the E (N)  
button pressed and rotate the command dial until the desired  
value is selected in the viewfinder or information display. Normal  
exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to  
0 (adjustments to exposure compensation in % and I modes  
will be reset when another mode is selected). Exposure  
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.  
+
E (N) button  
Command dial  
Information display  
+2 EV  
–0.3 EV  
A The Information Display  
Exposure compensation options can also be  
accessed from the information display (0 9).  
A Mode M  
In mode M, exposure compensation affects only the exposure  
indicator.  
A Using a Flash  
When a flash is used, exposure compensation affects both background  
exposure and flash level.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Flash Compensation  
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output from the level  
suggested by the camera, changing the brightness of the main  
subject relative to the background. Flash output can be  
increased to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced  
to prevent unwanted highlights or reflections (0 347).  
Keep the M (Y) and E (N) buttons pressed and rotate the  
command dial until the desired value is selected in the  
viewfinder or information display. In general, positive values  
make the main subject seem brighter while negative values  
make it seem darker. Normal flash output can be restored by  
setting flash compensation to 0. Flash compensation is not  
reset when the camera is turned off.  
M (Y) button  
+
Command dial  
Information display  
E (N) button  
–0.3 EV  
+1 EV  
120 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A The Information Display  
Flash compensation options can also be  
accessed from the information display (0 9).  
A Optional Flash Units  
Flash compensation is also available with optional flash units that  
support the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS; see page 300). The  
flash compensation selected with the optional flash unit is added to  
the flash compensation selected with the camera.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preserving Detail in Highlights and  
Shadows  
Active D-Lighting  
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,  
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high  
contrast scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit  
outdoor scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of  
shaded subjects on a sunny day. Active D-Lighting is not  
recommended in mode M; in other modes, it is most effective  
when used with L (Matrix metering; 0 114).  
Active D-Lighting: Off  
Active D-Lighting: On  
1
Display Active D-Lighting options.  
Press the G button to display the  
menus. Highlight Active D-Lighting  
in the shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
122 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Choose an option.  
Highlight On or Off and  
press J (0 345).  
D Active D-Lighting  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) may appear in  
photographs taken with Active D-Lighting. Uneven shading may be  
visible with some subjects. Active D-Lighting can not be used at an ISO  
sensitivity of Hi 1.  
A Active D-Lighting” Versus “D-Lighting”  
Active D-Lighting adjusts exposure before shooting to optimize the  
dynamic range, while the D-Lighting option in the retouch menu  
(0 266) brightens shadows in images after shooting.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
White Balance  
White balance ensures that colors are unaffected by the color of  
the light source. Auto white balance is recommended for most  
light sources; other values can be selected if necessary  
according to the type of source:  
Option  
v Auto  
Description  
Automatic white balance adjustment.  
Recommended in most situations.  
Use under incandescent lighting.  
Use with the light sources listed on page 126.  
J
I
H
N
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
Flash  
Use with the flash.  
G
M
Cloudy  
Shade  
Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
Measure white balance or copy white balance  
from existing photo (0 129).  
L
Preset manual  
124 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1
2
Display white balance  
options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current white  
balance setting in the  
information display and  
press J.  
P button  
Choose a white balance  
option.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A The Shooting Menu  
White balance can be selected using the  
White balance option in the shooting  
menu (0 222), which also can be used to  
fine-tune white balance (0 127) or  
measure a value for preset white balance  
(0 129).  
The I Fluorescent option in the White  
balance menu can be used to select the  
light source from the bulb types shown at  
right.  
A Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other  
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a  
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an  
object would have to be heated to radiate light in the same  
wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the  
neighborhood of 5000–5500 K appear white, light sources with a lower  
color temperature, such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly  
yellow or red. Light sources with a higher color temperature appear  
tinged with blue. The camera white balance options are adapted to  
the following color temperatures (all figures are approximate):  
I (sodium-vapor lamps): 2700 K  
J (incandescent)/  
H (direct sunlight): 5200 K  
N (flash): 5400 K  
I (warm-white fluorescent):  
3000 K  
I (white fluorescent): 3700 K  
I (cool-white fluorescent):  
4200 K  
G (cloudy): 6000 K  
I (daylight fluorescent): 6500 K  
I (high temp. mercury-vapor):  
7200 K  
M (shade): 8000 K  
I (day white fluorescent): 5000 K  
126 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
White balance can be “fine-tuned” to compensate for variations  
in the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color  
cast into an image. White balance is fine-tuned using the White  
balance option in the shooting menu.  
1
Select a white balance  
option.  
Press G to display the  
menus, then highlight  
White balance in the  
shooting menu and press  
2. Highlight the desired  
white balance option and  
press 2 (if Fluorescent is  
selected, highlight the  
desired lighting type and  
press 2; note that fine-  
tuning is not available with  
Preset manual).  
G button  
P, S, A, and M Modes 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Fine-tune white balance.  
Use the multi selector to fine-tune white balance.  
Coordinates  
Increase green  
Increase  
blue  
Increase  
amber  
Increase magenta  
Adjustment  
A White Balance Fine-Tuning  
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For  
example, moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such  
as J (incandescent) is selected will make photographs slightly  
“colder” but will not actually make them blue.  
3
Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
128 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Preset Manual  
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance  
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for  
light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available  
for setting preset white balance:  
Method  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that  
Measure will be used in final photo and white balance measured by  
camera (see below).  
White balance is copied from photo on memory card  
(0 133).  
Use photo  
❚❚ Measuring a Value for Preset White Balance  
1
2
Light a reference object.  
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that  
will be used in the final photograph.  
Display white balance options.  
To display the menus, press the G  
button. Highlight White balance in  
the shooting menu and press 2 to  
display white balance options.  
Highlight Preset manual and press  
2.  
G button  
P, S, A, and M Modes 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Select Measure.  
Highlight Measure and  
press 2.  
Select Yes.  
The menu shown at right  
will be displayed; highlight  
Yes and press J.  
The camera will enter preset  
measurement mode.  
When the camera is ready to measure  
white balance, a flashing D(L) will  
appear in the viewfinder and  
information display.  
130 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5
6
Measure white balance.  
Before the indicators stop flashing,  
frame the reference object so that it  
fills the viewfinder and press the  
shutter-release button all the way down. No photograph will  
be recorded; white balance can be measured accurately even  
when the camera is not in focus.  
Check the results.  
If the camera was able to measure a  
value for white balance, the message  
shown at right will be displayed and  
a will flash in the viewfinder for  
about eight seconds before the  
camera returns to shooting mode. To  
return to shooting mode immediately,  
press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the  
camera may be unable to measure  
white balance. A message will appear  
in the information display and a  
flashing b a will appear in the  
viewfinder for about eight seconds.  
Return to Step 5 and measure white  
balance again.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Measuring Preset White Balance  
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct  
measurement mode will end in the time selected for the Auto off  
timers option in the setup menu (0 245). The default setting is eight  
seconds.  
D Preset White Balance  
The camera can store only one value for preset white balance at a time;  
the existing value will be replaced when a new value is measured.  
Note that exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring  
white balance; when shooting in mode M, adjust exposure so that the  
exposure indicator shows 0 (0 109).  
A Other Methods for Measuring Preset White Balance  
To enter preset measurement mode (see above) after selecting preset  
white balance in the information display (0 125), press J for a few  
seconds. If white balance has been assigned to the Fn button (0 251),  
white balance preset measurement mode can be activated by keeping  
the Fn button pressed for a few seconds after selecting preset white  
balance with the Fn button and command dial.  
A Gray Panels  
For more precise results, measure white balance using a standard gray  
panel.  
132 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph  
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a  
photograph on the memory card.  
1
Select Preset manual.  
To display the menus, press the G  
button. Highlight White balance in  
the shooting menu and press 2 to  
display white balance options.  
Highlight Preset manual and press  
2.  
G button  
2
3
Select Use photo.  
Highlight Use photo and  
press 2.  
Choose Select image.  
Highlight Select image and  
press 2 (to skip the  
remaining steps and use the  
image last selected for  
preset white balance, select  
This image).  
P, S, A, and M Modes 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
6
Choose a folder.  
Highlight the folder  
containing the source  
image and press 2.  
Highlight the source  
image.  
To view the highlighted  
image full frame, press and  
hold the X button.  
Copy white balance.  
Press J to set preset white balance to  
the white balance value for the  
highlighted photograph.  
134 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Picture Controls  
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share  
image processing settings, including sharpening, contrast,  
brightness, saturation, and hue, among compatible devices and  
software.  
Selecting a Picture Control  
Choose a Picture Control according to the subject or type of  
scene.  
Option  
Description  
Recommended for most situations, this option uses  
standard processing for balanced results.  
A good choice for photographs that will later be  
extensively processed or retouched, this option uses  
minimal processing for natural results.  
Choose this option for photographs that emphasize  
primary colors. Pictures are enhanced for a vivid,  
photoprint effect.  
Q
R
Standard  
Neutral  
Vivid  
S
T
e
f
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.  
Process portraits for skin with natural texture and a  
rounded feel.  
Portrait  
Landscape  
Produces vibrant landscapes and cityscapes.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
1
2
Display Picture Control options.  
Press the G button to display the  
menus. Highlight Set Picture Control  
in the shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
Select a Picture Control.  
Highlight a Picture Control  
and press J.  
136 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modifying Picture Controls  
Picture Controls can be modified to suit the scene or the user’s  
creative intent. Choose a balanced combination of settings  
using Quick adjust, or make manual adjustments to individual  
settings.  
1
Select a Picture Control.  
Press G to display the  
menus, then highlight Set  
Picture Control in the  
shooting menu and press  
2. Highlight the desired  
Picture Control and press 2.  
G button  
2
Adjust settings.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight  
the desired setting and  
press 4 or 2 to choose a  
value (0 139). Repeat this  
step until all settings have  
been adjusted, or select  
Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of settings.  
Default settings can be restored by pressing the O button.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
Save changes and exit.  
Press J.  
Picture Controls that have been  
modified from default settings are  
indicated by an asterisk (“*”).  
138 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Picture Control Settings  
Option  
Description  
Mute or heighten the effect of the selected Picture  
Control (note that this resets all manual adjustments).  
Not available with Neutral or Monochrome Picture  
Controls.  
Quick adjust  
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust  
Sharpening sharpening automatically according to the type of  
scene.  
Adjust contrast manually or select A to let the camera  
adjust contrast automatically.  
Contrast  
Raise or lower brightness without loss of detail in  
highlights or shadows.  
Brightness  
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust  
Saturation saturation automatically according to the type of  
scene.  
Hue  
Adjust hue.  
Filter  
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome  
effects  
photographs (0 141).  
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs  
(0 141).  
Toning  
P, S, A, and M Modes 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
D “A” (Auto)  
Results for auto sharpening, contrast, and saturation vary with  
exposure and the position of the subject in the frame.  
A The Picture Control Grid  
To display a grid showing saturation (non-  
monochrome controls only) and contrast for  
the Picture Control selected in Step 2, press  
and hold the X button.  
The icons for Picture Controls that use auto  
contrast and saturation are displayed in  
green in the Picture Control grid, and lines  
appear parallel to the axes of the grid.  
A Previous Settings  
The line under the value display in the  
Picture Control setting menu indicates the  
previous value for the setting.  
140 P, S, A, and M Modes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)  
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on  
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:  
Option  
Description  
Y
Yellow Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the  
brightness of the sky in landscape photographs.  
Orange produces more contrast than yellow, red more  
contrast than orange.  
O
Orange  
Red  
R
G
Green Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.  
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more  
pronounced than those produced by physical glass filters.  
A Toning (Monochrome Only)  
Choose from B&W (black-and-white), Sepia,  
Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red,  
Yellow, Green, Blue Green, Blue, Purple  
Blue, Red Purple. Pressing 3 when Toning  
is selected displays saturation options. Press  
4 or 2 to adjust saturation. Saturation  
control is not available when B&W (black-  
and-white) is selected.  
P, S, A, and M Modes 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Live View  
Framing Photographs in the Monitor  
Follow the steps below to take photographs in live view.  
1
2
3
Press the a button.  
The view through the lens will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
a button  
Position the focus point.  
Position the focus point over your  
subject as described on page 147.  
Focus point  
Focus.  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway. The focus point will flash  
green while the camera focuses. If the  
camera is able to focus, the focus point will be displayed in  
green; if the camera is unable to focus, the focus point will  
flash red (note that pictures can be taken even when the  
focus point flashes red; check focus in the monitor before  
shooting). Except in i and j modes, exposure can be  
locked by pressing the A (L) button.  
142 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
4
Take the picture.  
Press the shutter-release  
button the rest of the way  
down. The monitor turns  
off and the memory card  
access lamp lights during  
recording. Do not remove  
the battery or memory card  
Memory card access lamp  
until recording is complete. When shooting is complete, the  
photograph will be displayed in the monitor for a few  
seconds before the camera returns to live view mode. To exit,  
press the a button.  
Live View 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Focusing in Live View  
Follow the steps below to choose focus and AF-area modes and  
position the focus point.  
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Focuses (Focus Mode)  
The following focus modes are available in live view (note that  
full-time–servo AF is not available in U, g, ', and ( modes):  
Option  
Description  
Single-servo For stationary subjects. Focus locks when  
AF-S  
AF-F  
AF  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
For moving subjects. Camera focuses  
continuously until shutter-release button is  
pressed. Focus locks when shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
Full-time-  
servo AF  
MF Manual focus Focus manually (0 154).  
1
Display focus options.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current focus  
mode in the information  
display and press J.  
P button  
144 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
2
Choose a focus option.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
❚❚ Choosing How the Camera Picks the Area (AF-Area Mode)  
In modes other than i, j, and (, the following AF-area modes  
can be selected in live view (note that subject-tracking AF is not  
available in %, U, g, ', and 3 modes):  
Option  
Description  
Use for portraits. The camera automatically  
detects and focuses on portrait subjects.  
Use for hand-held shots of landscapes and  
other non-portrait subjects. Use the multi  
selector to select the focus point.  
6
7
Face-priority AF  
Wide-area AF  
Use for pin-point focus on a selected spot in the  
frame. A tripod is recommended.  
8
Normal-area AF  
Subject-  
tracking AF  
9
Use if you want focus to track a selected subject.  
Live View 145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
1
2
Display AF-area modes.  
Press the P button, then  
highlight the current AF-  
area mode in the  
information display and  
press J.  
P button  
Choose an AF-area mode.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
146 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Choose the focus point.  
6 (face-priority AF): A double yellow  
border will be displayed when the  
camera detects a portrait subject (if  
multiple faces, up to a maximum of  
35, are detected, the camera will focus  
on the closest subject; to choose a  
different subject, use the multi  
selector). If the camera can no longer  
Focus point  
detect the subject (because, for example, the subject has  
turned to face away from the camera), the border will no  
longer be displayed.  
7/8 (wide- and normal-area  
AF): Use the multi selector to  
move the focus point  
anywhere in the frame, or  
press J to position the  
focus point in the center of  
Focus point  
the frame.  
9 (subject-tracking AF):  
Position the focus point  
over your subject and press  
J. The focus point will  
track the selected subject as  
it moves through the frame.  
To end focus tracking, press  
J a second time.  
Focus point  
Live View 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
The Live View Display  
Item  
Description  
The mode currently selected with the  
mode dial.  
0
25, 47,  
50, 100  
q
w
Shooting mode  
“No movie” icon Indicates that movies can not be recorded.  
The amount of time remaining before live  
e
r
Time remaining view ends automatically. Displayed if  
shooting will end in 30 s or less.  
152, 161  
158  
Microphone  
sensitivity  
Microphone sensitivity for movie  
recording.  
Sound level for audio recording. Displayed  
in red if level is too high; adjust  
microphone sensitivity accordingly. Left (L)  
and right (R) channel indicators appear  
when optional ME-1 or other stereo  
microphone is used.  
Displayed when On is selected for Movie  
settings > Wind noise reduction in the  
shooting menu.  
t
y
Sound level  
158  
159  
Wind noise  
reduction  
148 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Item  
Description  
0
Manual movie  
settings indicator movie settings in mode M.  
Displayed when On is selected for Manual  
u
159  
i
o
Focus mode  
AF-area mode  
The current focus mode.  
The current AF-area mode.  
The frame size of movies recorded in movie  
mode.  
144  
!
!
Movie frame size  
158  
156  
Time remaining The recording time remaining in movie  
(movie mode)  
mode.  
The current focus point. The display varies  
!
!
Focus point  
with the option selected for AF-area mode 147  
(0 145).  
Indicates whether the photograph would  
Exposure  
indicator  
be under- or over-exposed at current  
109  
settings (mode M only).  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
Live View 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Live View/Movie Recording Display Options  
Press the R button to cycle through display  
options as shown below (note that display  
options are not available in mode I).  
Circled areas indicate edges of movie frame  
crop.  
R button  
Show photo indicators  
Show movie indicators  
(0 155) *  
Framing grid*  
Hide indicators*  
* A crop showing the area recorded is displayed during movie  
recording when frame sizes other than 640 × 424 are selected for  
Movie settings > Frame size/frame rate in the shooting menu  
(0 158; the area outside the movie frame crop is grayed out when  
movie indicators are displayed).  
150 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Camera Settings  
Except when movie indicators are displayed, you can access the  
following live view photography settings by pressing the P button:  
image quality (0 85), image size (0 87), white balance (0 124), flash  
mode (0 90, 92), ISO sensitivity (0 95), focus mode (0 144), AF-area  
mode (0 145), metering (0 114), flash compensation (0 120), and  
exposure compensation (0 118). When movie indicators are  
displayed, movie settings can be adjusted (0 161).  
P button  
A Exposure  
Depending on the scene, exposure may differ from that which would  
be obtained when live view is not used. Metering in live view is  
adjusted to suit the live view display, producing photographs with  
exposure close to what is seen in the monitor (note that exposure  
compensation can only be previewed in the monitor at values  
between +3 EV and –3 EV). To prevent light entering via the viewfinder  
from appearing in the photograph or interfering with exposure, we  
recommend that you cover the viewfinder with your hand or other  
objects such as an optional eyepiece cap (0 307) before taking  
pictures without your eye to the viewfinder (0 73).  
A HDMI  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera  
monitor will remain on and the video device will display the view  
through the lens. If the device supports HDMI-CEC, select Off for the  
HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 218) before  
shooting in live view.  
Live View 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D Shooting in Live View Mode  
Although it will not appear in the final picture, distortion may be  
visible in the monitor if the camera is panned horizontally or an object  
moves at high speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave  
after-images in the monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots  
may also appear. Flicker and banding visible in the monitor under  
fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps can be reduced using  
Flicker reduction (0 241), although they may still be visible in the  
final photograph at some shutter speeds. When shooting in live view  
mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other strong light  
sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in damage to  
the camera’s internal circuitry.  
Live view ends automatically if the mode dial is rotated to g or the  
mode dial is rotated from g to another setting.  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s  
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Note that  
the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise  
(bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed  
in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably  
warm, but this does not indicate a malfunction):  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to  
record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended  
periods  
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view, wait for  
the internal circuits to cool and then try again.  
D The Count Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends automatically  
(0  
148; the timer turns red 5 s before the auto off timer expires (0 245)  
or if live view is about to end to protect the internal circuits). Depending  
on shooting conditions, the timer may appear immediately when live  
view is selected.  
152 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
D Using Autofocus in Live View  
Autofocus is slower in live view and the monitor may brighten or  
darken while the camera focuses. The camera may be unable to focus  
in the situations listed below (note that the focus point may  
sometimes be displayed in green when the camera is unable to focus):  
The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame  
The subject lacks contrast  
The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting  
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or  
other light source that changes in brightness  
Flicker or banding appears under fluorescent, mercury-vapor,  
sodium-vapor, or similar lighting  
A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used  
The subject appears smaller than the focus point  
The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., blinds  
or a row of windows in a skyscraper)  
The subject is moving  
In addition, the subject-tracking AF may be unable to track subjects if  
they move quickly, leave the frame or are obscured by other objects,  
change visibly in size, color, or brightness, or are too small, too large,  
too bright, too dark, or similar in color or brightness to the  
background.  
Live View 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A Manual Focus  
To focus in manual focus mode (0 83),  
rotate the lens focus ring until the subject is  
in focus.  
To magnify the view in the monitor up to about 8.3 × for precise focus,  
press the X button. While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a  
navigation window will appear in a gray frame at the bottom right  
corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll to areas of the  
frame not visible in the monitor (available only if 7 (Wide-area AF) or  
8 (Normal-area AF) is selected for AF-area mode), or press W (Q) to  
zoom out.  
X button  
Navigation window  
154 Live View  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Recording and Viewing Movies  
Recording Movies  
Movies can be recorded in live view mode.  
1
Press the a button.  
The view through the lens will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
D The 0 Icon  
A 0 icon (0 148) indicates that movies  
can not be recorded.  
a button  
A Before Recording  
Set aperture before recording in mode A  
or M (0 106, 108).  
2
Focus.  
Frame the opening shot and focus as  
described in Steps 2 and 3 of “Framing  
Photographs in the Monitor” (0 142;  
see also “Focusing in Live View” on pages 144–147). Note  
that the number of subjects that can be detected in face-  
priority AF drops during movie recording.  
Recording and Viewing Movies 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
Start recording.  
Press the movie-record button to start  
recording. A recording indicator and  
the time available are displayed in the  
monitor. Except in i and j modes,  
exposure can be locked by pressing  
the A (L) button (0 116) or (in  
modes P, S, A, and %) altered by up to  
Movie-record button  
Recording indicator  
3 EV in steps of 1  
3 EV by pressing the  
/
E (N) button and rotating the  
command dial (0 119; note that  
depending on the brightness of the  
subject, changes to exposure may  
have no visible effect).  
Time remaining  
4
End recording.  
Press the movie-record button again to end recording.  
Recording will end automatically when the maximum length  
is reached, the memory card is full, or another mode is  
selected.  
A Taking Photographs During Movie Recording  
To end movie recording, take a photograph, and exit to live view, press  
the shutter-release button all the way down and hold it in this position  
until the shutter is released.  
A Maximum Length  
The maximum length for individual movie files is 4 GB (for maximum  
recording times, see page 158); note that depending on memory card  
write speed, shooting may end before this length is reached (0 310).  
156 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
D Recording Movies  
Flicker, banding, or distortion may be visible in the monitor and in the  
final movie under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium lamps or if the  
camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high speed  
through frame (flicker and banding can be reduced using Flicker  
reduction; 0 241). Bright light sources may leave after-images when  
the camera is panned. Jagged edges, color fringing, moiré, and bright  
spots may also appear. Bright bands may appear in some areas of the  
frame if the subject is briefly illuminated by a flash or other bright,  
momentary light source. When recording movies, avoid pointing the  
camera at the sun or other strong light sources. Failure to observe this  
precaution could result in damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.  
The camera can record both video and sound; do not cover the  
microphone during recording. Note that the built-in microphone may  
record lens noise during autofocus and vibration reduction.  
Flash lighting can not be used during movie recording.  
Live view may end automatically to prevent damage to the camera’s  
internal circuits; exit live view when the camera is not in use. Note that  
the temperature of the camera’s internal circuits may rise and noise  
(bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, or fog) may be displayed  
in the following instances (the camera may also become noticeably  
warm, but this does not indicate a malfunction):  
The ambient temperature is high  
The camera has been used for extended periods in live view or to  
record movies  
The camera has been used in continuous release mode for extended  
periods  
If live view does not start when you attempt to start live view or movie  
recording, wait for the internal circuits to cool and then try again.  
Matrix metering is used regardless of the metering method selected.  
Shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are adjusted automatically unless On  
is selected for Manual movie settings (0 159) and the camera is in  
mode M.  
Recording and Viewing Movies 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Movie Settings  
The camera offers the following movie settings.  
Frame size/frame rate, Movie quality: Choose from the  
following options. The frame rate depends on the option  
currently selected for Video mode in the setup menu  
(0 260):  
Frame size/frame rate  
Maximum length  
(high movie quality /  
normal movie quality) 4  
Frame size  
(pixels)  
Frame rate 1  
60p2  
L/t  
M/u  
N/r  
O/s  
P/k  
Q/l  
R/o  
S/n  
T/p  
10 min./20 min.  
50p3  
1920 × 1080  
30p2  
25p3  
24p  
20 min./29 min. 59 s  
60p2  
1280 × 720  
640 × 424  
50p3  
30p2  
29 min. 59 s/  
29 min. 59 s  
25p3  
1
Listed value. Actual frame rates for 60p, 50p, 30p, 25p, and 24p are 59.94, 50, 29.97, 25,  
and 23.976 fps respectively.  
2
3
4
Available when NTSC is selected for Video mode (0 260).  
Available when PAL is selected for Video mode.  
Movies recorded in miniature effect mode are up to three minutes long when played back.  
Microphone: Turn the built-in or optional ME-1 stereo  
microphones (0 161, 309) on or off or adjust microphone  
sensitivity. Choose Auto sensitivity to adjust sensitivity  
automatically, Microphone off to turn sound recording off; to  
select microphone sensitivity manually, select Manual  
sensitivity and choose a sensitivity.  
158 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Wind noise reduction: Select On to enable the low-cut filter  
for the built-in microphone (optional stereo microphones are  
unaffected; 0 161, 309), reducing noise produced by wind  
blowing over the microphone (note that other sounds may  
also be affected). Wind-noise reduction for optional stereo  
microphones can be enabled or disabled using microphone  
controls.  
Manual movie settings: Choose On  
to allow manual adjustments to  
shutter speed and ISO sensitivity when  
the camera is in mode M. Shutter  
speed can be set to values as fast as  
1
/
4000 s; the slowest speed available  
30 s for  
50 s for 50p, and 1  
60 s for 60p.  
varies with the frame rate: 1  
frame rates of 24p, 25p, and 30p, 1  
/
/
/
ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 100 and Hi 1  
(0 95). If shutter speed and ISO sensitivity are not in these  
ranges when live view starts, they will automatically be set to  
supported values, and remain at these values when live view  
ends. Note that ISO sensitivity is fixed at the value selected;  
the camera does not adjust ISO sensitivity automatically when  
On is selected for ISO sensitivity settings > Auto ISO  
sensitivity control in the shooting menu (0 227).  
Recording and Viewing Movies 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
1
2
Select Movie settings.  
Press the G button to display the  
menus. Highlight Movie settings in  
the shooting menu and press 2.  
G button  
Choose movie options.  
Highlight the desired item  
and press 2, then highlight  
an option and press J.  
A HDMI and Other Video Devices  
When the camera is attached to an HDMI video device, the camera  
monitor will remain on and the video device will display the view  
through the lens. If the device supports HDMI-CEC, select Off for the  
HDMI > Device control option in the setup menu (0 218) before  
shooting in live view.  
160 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A The Live View Display  
The movie crop can be viewed during live view by pressing the R  
button to select the “show movie indicators, hide indicators, or  
“framing grid” display (0 150). When movie indicators are displayed,  
you can access the following movie settings by pressing the P button:  
movie frame size/quality, microphone sensitivity, focus mode (0 144),  
AF-area mode (0 145), white balance (0 124), and exposure  
compensation (0 118). If On is selected for Movie settings > Manual  
movie settings (0 159) in mode M, ISO sensitivity (0 95) can be  
adjusted in place of exposure compensation.  
P button  
A Using an External Microphone  
The optional ME-1 stereo microphone can be used to record sound in  
stereo or to reduce noise caused by lens vibration being recorded  
during autofocus.  
D The Count-Down Display  
A count down will be displayed 30 s before live view ends  
automatically (0 148). Depending on shooting conditions, the timer  
may appear immediately when movie recording begins. Note that  
regardless of the amount of recording time available, live view will still  
end automatically when the timer expires. Wait for the internal circuits  
to cool before resuming movie recording.  
Recording and Viewing Movies 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Viewing Movies  
Movies are indicated by a 1 icon in full-frame playback (0 170).  
Press J to start playback; your current position is indicated by  
the movie progress bar.  
1 icon  
Length  
Current position/total length  
Movie progress bar  
Guide  
Volume  
162 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following operations can be performed:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Pause  
Pause playback.  
Resume playback when movie is paused or  
during rewind/advance.  
Play  
Speed increases with each press, from 2×  
to 4× to 8× to 16×; keep pressed to skip to  
beginning or end of movie (first frame is  
indicated by h in top right corner of  
monitor, last frame by i). If playback is  
paused, movie rewinds or advances one  
frame at a time; hold for continuous  
rewind or advance.  
Advance/rewind  
Rotate the command dial to skip ahead or  
back 10 s.  
Skip 10 s  
Press X to increase volume, W (Q) to  
decrease.  
Adjust volume  
X/W (Q)  
Return to full-  
frame playback  
/K Press 1 or K to exit to full-frame playback.  
Recording and Viewing Movies 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Editing Movies  
Trim footage to create edited copies of movies or save selected  
frames as JPEG stills.  
Option  
Choose start/end  
point  
Description  
Create a copy from which the opening or  
closing footage has been removed.  
f
g
Save selected frame Save a selected frame as a JPEG still.  
Trimming Movies  
To create trimmed copies of movies:  
1
2
Display a movie full frame.  
Pause the movie on the  
new opening or closing  
frame.  
Play the movie back as  
described on page 162,  
pressing J to start and  
resume playback and 3 to  
pause. Pause playback  
Movie progress bar  
when you reach the new opening or closing frame.  
164 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3
4
Select Choose start/end point.  
Press the P button, then highlight  
Choose start/end point and press 2.  
P button  
Choose the current frame as the new  
start or end point.  
To create a copy that begins from the  
current frame, highlight Start point  
and press J. The frames before the  
current frame will be removed when  
you save the copy.  
Start point  
To create a copy that ends at the current frame, highlight End  
point and press J. The frames after the current frame will be  
removed when you save the copy.  
End point  
Recording and Viewing Movies 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Confirm the new start or  
end point.  
If the desired frame is not  
currently displayed, press 4  
or 2 to advance or rewind  
(to skip to 10 s ahead or  
back, rotate the command  
dial).  
6
7
Create the copy.  
Once the desired frame is displayed,  
press 1.  
Preview the movie.  
To preview the copy,  
highlight Preview and  
press J (to interrupt the  
preview and return to the  
save options menu, press  
1). To abandon the current  
copy and return to Step 5, highlight Cancel and press J; to  
save the copy, proceed to Step 8.  
8
Save the copy.  
Highlight Save as new file  
and press J to save the  
copy to a new file. To  
replace the original movie  
file with the edited copy,  
highlight Overwrite  
existing file and press J.  
166 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
D Trimming Movies  
Movies must be at least two seconds long. The copy will not be saved  
if there is insufficient space available on the memory card.  
Copies have the same time and date of creation as the original.  
A Choosing the Role of the Current Frame  
To make the frame displayed in Step 5 the new end point (x) instead of  
the new start point (w) or vice versa, press the A (L) button.  
A (L) button  
Recording and Viewing Movies 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Saving Selected Frames  
To save a copy of a selected frame as a JPEG still:  
1
Pause the movie on the  
desired frame.  
Play the movie back as  
described on page 162,  
pressing J to start and  
resume playback and 3 to  
pause. Pause the movie at  
the frame you intend to copy.  
2
Choose Save selected frame.  
Press the P button, then highlight  
Save selected frame and press 2.  
P button  
168 Recording and Viewing Movies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Create a still copy.  
Press 1 to create a still copy  
of the current frame.  
Save the copy.  
Highlight Yes and press J  
to create a fine-quality  
(0 85) JPEG copy of the  
selected frame.  
A Save Selected Frame  
JPEG movie stills created with the Save selected frame option can not  
be retouched. JPEG movie stills lack some categories of photo  
information (0 172).  
Recording and Viewing Movies 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playback and Deletion  
Full-Frame Playback  
To play photographs back, press the K button. The most recent  
photograph will be displayed in the monitor.  
K button  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press 2 to view photographs in order  
recorded, 4 to view photographs in reverse  
order.  
View additional  
photographs  
View additional  
photo info  
Change photo info displayed (0 172).  
W (Q)  
See page 180 for more information on the  
thumbnail display.  
View thumbnails  
Zoom in on  
photograph  
See page 182 for more information on  
playback zoom.  
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Press O again to delete photo.  
X
O
Delete images  
170 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
To  
Use  
Description  
To protect image, or to remove protection  
A (L) from protected image, press A (L) button  
(0 184).  
Change protect  
status  
If current picture is marked with 1 icon to  
show that it is a movie, pressing J starts  
movie playback (0 162). If the current  
picture is a panorama, pressing J starts  
panorama playback (0 66).  
View movie or  
panorama  
A The P Button  
Pressing the P button in full-frame, thumbnail, or calendar playback  
displays the dialog shown at right, where you can rate pictures  
(0 186), retouch photos and edit movies (0 164, 263), and select  
pictures for transfer to a smart device when an optional wireless  
mobile adapter is connected (0 189).  
P button  
Playback and Deletion 171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in full-  
frame playback. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo  
information as shown below. Note that “image only, shooting  
data, RGB histograms, highlights, and overview data are only  
displayed if corresponding option is selected for Playback  
display options (0 220). Location data are only displayed if an  
optional GP-1 or GP-1A GPS unit (0 309) was used when the  
photo was taken (0 259).  
File information  
None (image only)  
Overview  
Highlights  
Location data  
RGB histogram  
Shooting data  
172 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ File Information  
1 Protect status............................... 184 6 Image quality .................................85  
2 Retouch indicator....................... 265 7 Image size .......................................87  
3 Upload marking.......................... 189 8 Time of recording.................18, 242  
4 Frame number/total number of  
images  
9 Date of recording .................18, 242  
10 Folder name................................. 257  
11 Rating............................................ 186  
5 File name ...................................... 250  
❚❚ Highlights *  
1 Protect status............................... 184 4 Frame number/total number of  
images  
2 Retouch indicator....................... 265  
5 Image highlights  
3 Upload marking.......................... 189  
6 Rating............................................ 186  
* Flashing areas indicate highlights (areas that may be overexposed).  
Playback and Deletion 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ RGB Histogram  
1 Frame number/total number of  
5 Histogram (blue channel)  
images  
6 Upload marking.......................... 189  
7 Retouch indicator....................... 265  
2 Histogram (RGB channel). In all  
histograms, horizontal axis gives  
pixel brightness, vertical axis  
number of pixels.  
8 White balance.............................. 124  
White balance fine-tuning ....... 127  
Preset manual.............................. 129  
3 Histogram (red channel)  
9 Protect status............................... 184  
4 Histogram (green channel)  
10 Rating ............................................ 186  
A Playback Zoom  
To zoom in on the photograph when the  
histogram is displayed, press X. Use the X  
and W (Q) buttons to zoom in and out and  
scroll the image with the multi selector. The  
histogram will be updated to show only the  
data for the portion of the image visible in  
the monitor.  
174 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A Histograms  
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from  
those displayed in imaging applications. Some sample histograms are  
shown below:  
If the image contains objects  
with a wide range of  
brightnesses, the distribution of  
tones will be relatively even.  
If the image is dark, tone  
distribution will be shifted to the  
left.  
If the image is bright, tone  
distribution will be shifted to the  
right.  
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to  
the right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the  
distribution to the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall  
exposure when bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see  
photographs in the monitor.  
Playback and Deletion 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Shooting Data  
1 Protect status...............................184 11 Flash type ............................ 229, 299  
Commander mode 2  
2 Retouch indicator .......................265  
12 Flash mode...............................90, 92  
3 Upload marking ..........................189  
13 Flash control ................................ 229  
Flash compensation................... 120  
4 Frame number/total number of  
images  
14 Camera name  
5 Metering .......................................114  
Shutter speed ..............................101 15 Rating ............................................ 186  
Aperture........................................101  
6 Shooting mode .......25, 47, 50, 100  
ISO sensitivity 1 .............................. 95  
7 Exposure compensation ...........118  
8 Focal length..................................298  
9 Lens data  
10 Focus mode........................... 74, 144  
Lens VR (vibration reduction)2  
.......................................................355  
176 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
16 White balance ............................. 124 20 Sharpening .................................. 139  
White balance fine-tuning ....... 127  
Preset manual.............................. 129  
21 Contrast ........................................ 139  
22 Brightness .................................... 139  
23 Saturation 3................................... 139  
Filter effects3 ............................... 139  
24 Hue 3............................................... 139  
Toning 3 ......................................... 139  
17 Color space................................... 225  
18 Picture Control ............................ 135  
19 Quick adjust3 ............................... 139  
Original Picture Control 3 .......... 135  
25 Noise reduction........................... 226 27 Retouch history........................... 263  
26 Active D-Lighting 4 ..................... 122 28 Image comment......................... 244  
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with auto ISO sensitivity control  
on.  
2 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this  
function.  
3 May not be displayed depending on Picture Control used.  
4 AUTO is displayed if photo was taken with Active D-Lighting on.  
Playback and Deletion 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Overview Data  
15 Shooting mode ....... 25, 47, 50, 100  
16 Shutter speed .............................. 101  
17 Aperture........................................ 101  
18 ISO sensitivity 1 .............................. 95  
19 Image comment indicator........ 244  
20 Focal length ................................. 298  
21 Location data indicator ............. 259  
22 Active D-Lighting 2..................... 122  
23 Picture Control ............................ 135  
24 Flash mode...............................90, 92  
25 Color space................................... 225  
1 Frame number/total number of  
images  
2 Protect status...............................184  
3 Retouch indicator .......................265  
4 Camera name  
5 Upload marking ..........................189  
6 Histogram showing the  
distribution of tones in the image  
(0 175).  
7 Image quality................................. 85  
8 Image size....................................... 87  
9 File name ......................................250  
10 Time of recording ................ 18, 242  
11 Date of recording................. 18, 242  
12 Folder name .................................257  
13 Rating ............................................186  
14 Metering .......................................114  
26 Flash compensation................... 120  
Commander mode 3  
White balance fine-tuning ....... 127  
Preset manual.............................. 129  
28 Exposure compensation ........... 118  
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control  
on.  
2 AUTO is displayed if photo was taken with Active D-Lighting on.  
3 Displayed only in photos taken with accessories that support this  
function.  
178 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Location Data  
Location data are displayed only if a GP-1 or GP-1A GPS unit  
(0 309) was used when the photo was taken (0 259). In the  
case of movies, the data give the location at the start of  
recording.  
1 Protect status............................... 184 6 Longitude  
2 Retouch indicator....................... 265 7 Altitude  
3 Upload marking.......................... 189 8 Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
4 Frame number/total number of  
9 Rating............................................ 186  
images  
10 Camera name  
5 Latitude  
Playback and Deletion 179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of 4, 9, or 72 images, press  
the W (Q) button.  
W (Q)  
W (Q)  
X
X
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
Calendar  
playback  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press W (Q) button to increase the  
number of images displayed.  
Display more images W (Q)  
Press X button to reduce the number of  
images displayed. When four images are  
displayed, press to view highlighted image  
full frame.  
Display fewer images  
X
Use multi selector or command dial to  
highlight pictures.  
Highlight images  
Press J to display the highlighted image  
full frame.  
View highlighted image  
Delete highlighted  
photo  
O
See page 192 for more information.  
Change protect status  
of highlighted photo  
A (L) See page 184 for more information.  
180 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Calendar Playback  
To view images taken on a selected date, press the W (Q) button  
when 72 images are displayed.  
Date list  
W (Q)  
W (Q)  
X
X
Thumbnail list  
Calendar playback  
Full-frame  
playback  
Thumbnail playback  
The operations that can be performed depend on whether the  
cursor is in the date list or the thumbnail list:  
To  
Use  
Description  
W (Q) Press W (Q) or J button in date list to  
Toggle between date  
list and thumbnail list  
place cursor in thumbnail list. Press W (Q)  
J
again to return to date list.  
Exit to thumbnail  
playback/Zoom in on  
highlighted photo  
Date list: Exit to 72-frame playback.  
Thumbnail list: Press and hold X button to  
zoom in on highlighted picture.  
X
Highlight dates/  
Highlight images  
Date list: Highlight date.  
Thumbnail list: Highlight picture.  
Toggle full frame  
playback  
Thumbnail list: View highlighted picture.  
Date list: Delete all pictures taken on  
selected date.  
Thumbnail list: Delete highlighted picture  
(0 192).  
Delete highlighted  
photo(s)  
O
Change protect status  
of highlighted photo  
A (L) See page 184 for more information.  
Playback and Deletion 181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-  
frame playback or on the image currently highlighted in  
thumbnail or calendar playback. The following operations can  
be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press X to zoom in to maximum of  
approximately 38× (large images), 28×  
(medium images) or 19× (small images).  
Press W (Q) to zoom out. While photo is  
zoomed in, use multi selector to view  
areas of image not visible in monitor.  
Keep multi selector pressed to scroll  
rapidly to other areas of frame.  
Zoom in or out  
X / W (Q)  
Navigation window is displayed when  
zoom ratio is altered; area currently  
visible in monitor is indicated by yellow  
border.  
View other areas of  
image  
182 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
To  
Use  
Description  
Faces (up to 35) detected during zoom  
are indicated by white borders in  
navigation window. Press P and 1 or 3  
to zoom in or out; press P and 4 or 2 to  
view other faces.  
Select/zoom in on or  
out from faces  
P+  
Rotate command dial to view same  
location in other images at current zoom  
ratio. Playback zoom is cancelled when a  
movie is displayed.  
View other images  
Cancel zoom  
Cancel zoom and return to full-frame  
playback.  
Change protect  
status  
A (L) See page 184 for more information.  
Playback and Deletion 183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame, zoom, thumbnail, and calendar playback, the  
A (L) button can be used to protect photographs from  
accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted using the  
O button or the Delete option in the playback menu. Note that  
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is  
formatted (0 234).  
To protect a photograph:  
1
Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or  
highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
2
Press the A (L) button.  
The photograph will be marked with a P icon.  
A (L) button  
184 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A Removing Protection  
To remove protection from individual pictures so that they can be  
deleted, display pictures full-frame or highlight them in the thumbnail  
list and then press the A (L) button. To remove protection from all  
images in the folder or folders currently selected in the Playback  
folder menu (0 220), press the A (L) and O buttons together for  
about two seconds during playback.  
Playback and Deletion 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Rating Pictures  
Rate pictures or mark them as candidates for later deletion.  
Rating is not available with protected images.  
Rating Individual Pictures  
1
Select an image.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or  
highlight it in the thumbnail list in thumbnail or calendar  
playback.  
2
Display playback options.  
Press the P button to display playback  
options.  
P button  
3
Select Rating.  
Highlight Rating and press  
J.  
186 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
5
Choose a rating.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose a  
rating of from zero to five  
stars, or select ) to mark the  
picture as a candidate for  
later deletion.  
Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
Rating Multiple Pictures  
Use the Rating option in the playback menu to rate multiple  
pictures.  
1
Select Rating.  
Press the G button to display the  
camera menus, then highlight Rating  
in the playback menu and press 2.  
G button  
Playback and Deletion 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Rate pictures.  
Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures (to view the currently  
highlighted picture full frame,  
press and hold the X button) and  
keeping the W (Q) button pressed,  
press 1 or 3 to choose a rating of  
from zero to five stars, or select )  
to mark the picture as a candidate  
for later deletion.  
W (Q) button  
Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
188 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selecting Pictures for Upload  
Follow the steps below to select up to 100 photos for upload to  
a smart device when an optional wireless mobile adapter is  
connected (0 309). Connect a wireless mobile adapter before  
proceeding. Movies can not be selected for upload.  
Selecting Individual Pictures for Upload  
1
Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in  
thumbnail or calendar playback.  
2
Display playback options.  
Press the P button.  
P button  
3
Choose Select to send to  
smart device/deselect.  
Highlight Select to send to  
smart device/deselect and  
press J. Pictures selected  
for upload are indicated by a  
&icon; to deselect, display  
or highlight the image and  
Playback and Deletion 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Selecting Multiple Pictures for Upload  
To change the upload status of multiple pictures, use the Select  
to send to smart device option in the playback menu when an  
optional wireless mobile adapter is connected.  
1
Choose Select to send to smart  
device.  
To display the menus, press the G  
button. Highlight Select to send to  
smart device in the playback menu  
and press 2.  
G button  
A The & Icon  
The & icon will no longer be displayed when upload is complete.  
190 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures and press W (Q) to select or  
deselect (to view the highlighted  
picture full screen, press and hold the  
X button). Selected pictures are  
marked by a & icon.  
W (Q) button  
Press J.  
Press J to complete the operation.  
Playback and Deletion 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Deleting Photographs  
Unprotected photographs can be deleted as described below.  
Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered.  
Full-Frame, Thumbnail, and Calendar Playback  
1
Select an image.  
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list in  
thumbnail or calendar playback.  
2
Press the O button.  
A confirmation dialog will be  
displayed.  
O button  
Full-frame playback  
Thumbnail playback  
3
Press the O button again.  
To delete the photograph, press the O  
button again. To exit without deleting  
the photograph, press the K button.  
192 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
The Playback Menu  
The Delete option in the playback menu contains the following  
options. Note that depending on the number of images, some  
time may be required for deletion.  
Option  
Selected  
Description  
Delete selected pictures.  
Q
n
Select date Delete all pictures taken on a selected date.  
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected  
for playback (0 220).  
R
All  
❚❚ Selected: Deleting Selected Photographs  
1
Select Delete.  
To display the menus, press the G  
button. Highlight Delete in the  
playback menu and press 2.  
G button  
A Calendar Playback  
During calendar playback, you can delete all photographs taken on a  
selected date by highlighting the date in the date list and pressing the  
O button (0 181).  
Playback and Deletion 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2
3
Choose Selected.  
Highlight Selected and  
press 2.  
Highlight a picture.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a picture (to view  
the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X  
button).  
4
Select the highlighted picture.  
Press the W (Q) button to select the  
highlighted picture. Selected pictures  
are marked by a O icon. Repeat steps  
3 and 4 to select additional pictures;  
to deselect a picture, highlight it and  
press W (Q).  
W (Q) button  
194 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
Press J to complete the  
operation.  
A confirmation dialog will  
be displayed; highlight Yes  
and press J.  
Playback and Deletion 195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Select Date: Deleting Photographs Taken on a Selected Date  
1
Choose Select Date.  
In the delete menu,  
highlight Select date and  
press 2.  
2
Highlight a date.  
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a  
date.  
To view the pictures taken on the  
highlighted date, press W (Q). Use  
the multi selector to scroll through  
the pictures, or press and hold X to  
view the current picture full screen.  
Press W (Q) to return to the date list.  
W (Q) button  
196 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
4
Select the highlighted  
date.  
Press 2 to select all pictures  
taken on the highlighted  
date. Selected dates are  
indicated by check marks.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to  
select additional dates; to deselect a date, highlight it and  
press 2.  
Press J to complete the  
operation.  
A confirmation dialog will  
be displayed; highlight Yes  
and press J.  
Playback and Deletion 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Slide Shows  
The Slide show option in the playback menu is used to display a  
slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder (0 220).  
1
Select Slide show.  
To display the slide show menu, press  
the G button and select Slide show  
in the playback menu.  
G button  
198 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Start the slide show.  
Highlight Start in the slide show  
menu and press J.  
The following operations can be performed while the slide  
show is in progress:  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2  
to skip to next frame.  
Skip back/skip ahead  
View additional  
photo info  
Change photo info displayed (0 172).  
Pause/resume slide  
show  
Pause show. Press again to resume.  
Press X during movie playback to  
increase volume, W (Q) to decrease.  
End show and return to playback  
mode.  
Raise/lower volume X / W (Q)  
Exit to playback  
K
mode  
The dialog shown at right is displayed  
when the show ends. Select Restart to  
restart or Exit to return to the playback  
menu.  
Playback and Deletion 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Slide Show Options  
Before starting a slide show, you can use the options in the slide  
show menu to select the images displayed by type or rating and  
choose how long each image is displayed.  
Image type: Choose from Still images  
and movies, Still images only,  
Movies only, and By rating. To  
include only pictures with selected  
ratings, highlight By rating and press  
2. A list of ratings will be displayed;  
highlight ratings and press 2 to select  
or deselect pictures with the  
highlighted rating for inclusion in the  
slide show. Selected ratings are  
indicated by a check mark. Press J to  
exit when the desired ratings are  
selected.  
Frame interval: Choose how long still  
images are displayed.  
Transition effects: Choose from On (each frame is pushed  
out of the display by the following frame) and Off (no  
transition between frames).  
200 Playback and Deletion  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Connections  
Installing ViewNX 2  
Install the supplied software to display and edit photographs  
and movies that have been copied to your computer. Before  
installing ViewNX 2, confirm that your computer meets the  
system requirements on page 203. Be sure to use the latest  
version of ViewNX 2, which is available for download from the  
websites listed on page xviii, as earlier versions that do not  
support the D3300 may fail to transfer NEF (RAW) images  
correctly.  
1
Launch the installer.  
Start the computer, insert the installer CD, and launch the  
installer. A language selection dialog will be displayed. If the  
desired language is not available, click Region Selection to  
choose a different region (region selection is not available in  
the European release).  
q Select region (if required)  
w Select language  
e Click Next  
Connections 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
Start the installer.  
Click Install and follow the on-screen instructions.  
Click Install  
3
4
Exit the installer.  
Windows  
Mac  
Click Yes  
Click OK  
Remove the installer CD from the CD-ROM drive.  
202 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
A System Requirements  
Windows  
Mac  
Photos: Intel Celeron,  
Pentium 4, Core Series;  
1.6 GHz or better  
Photos: Intel Core or Xeon  
series  
Movies (playback): Core Duo  
Movies (playback): Pentium D  
2 GHz or better; Intel Core i5  
3.0 GHz or better; Intel Core i5 or better recommended  
or better recommended  
when viewing movies with a  
frame size of 1280×720 or  
when viewing movies with a  
frame size of 1280×720 or  
more at a frame rate of  
CPU  
more at a frame rate of 30 fps 30 fps or above or movies  
or above or movies with a  
frame size of 1920×1080 or  
more  
with a frame size of  
1920×1080 or more  
Movies (editing): Intel Core i5  
or better  
Movies (editing): Intel Core i5 or  
better  
Pre-installed versions of  
Windows 8.1, Windows 7,  
Windows Vista, and  
Windows XP; note that 64-bit  
versions of Windows XP are not  
supported  
OS X 10.9, 10.8, or 10.7  
OS  
32-bit Windows 8.1, Windows 7, or 2 GB or more (4 GB or more  
Windows Vista: 1 GB or more  
recommended)  
(2 GB or more recommended)  
Memory 64-bit Windows 8.1, Windows 7, or  
(RAM)  
Windows Vista: 2 GB or more  
(4 GB or more recommended)  
Windows XP: 512 MB or more  
(2 GB or more recommended)  
Hard disk A minimum of 1 GB available on the startup disk (3 GB or more  
space  
recommended)  
Resolution: 1024×768 pixels (XGA) Resolution: 1024×768 pixels  
or more (1280×1024 pixels or more  
Graphics recommended)  
Color: 24-bit color (True Color) or  
more  
(XGA) or more (1280×1024 pixels or  
more recommended)  
Color: 24-bit color (millions of  
colors) or more  
See the websites listed on page xviii for the latest information on  
supported operating systems.  
Connections 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Using ViewNX 2  
Copy Pictures to the Computer  
Before proceeding, be sure you have installed the software on  
the supplied ViewNX 2 CD (0 201).  
1
Connect the USB cable.  
After turning the camera off and ensuring that a memory  
card is inserted, connect the supplied USB cable as shown  
and then turn the camera on.  
2
Start Nikon Transfer 2 component of ViewNX 2.  
If a message is displayed prompting you to choose a  
program, select Nikon Transfer 2.  
A Windows 7  
If the following dialog is displayed, select Nikon Transfer 2 as  
1 Under Import pictures and videos,  
click Change program. A program  
selection dialog will be displayed;  
select Import File using  
Nikon Transfer 2 and click OK.  
2 Double-click Import File.  
204 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3
Click Start Transfer.  
At default settings, pictures on the memory card will be  
copied to the computer.  
Start Transfer  
A During Transfer  
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while  
transfer is in progress.  
4
Terminate the connection.  
When transfer is complete, turn the camera off and  
disconnect the USB cable.  
A Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure the camera  
battery is fully charged.  
A Connecting Cables  
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface  
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an  
angle. Close the connector cover when the connector is not in use.  
A USB Hubs  
Transfer may not proceed as expected if the camera is connected via a  
USB hub or keyboard.  
Connections 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
View Pictures  
Pictures are displayed in ViewNX 2 when transfer is complete.  
A Starting ViewNX 2 Manually  
Windows: Double-click the ViewNX 2 shortcut on the desktop.  
Mac: Click the ViewNX 2 icon in the Dock.  
❚❚ Retouching Photographs  
To crop pictures and perform such tasks  
as adjusting sharpness and tone levels,  
click the Edit button in the ViewNX 2  
toolbar.  
❚❚ Editing Movies  
To perform such tasks as trimming  
unwanted footage from movies shot  
with the camera, click the Movie Editor  
button in the ViewNX 2 toolbar.  
206 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
❚❚ Printing Pictures  
Click the Print button in the ViewNX 2  
toolbar. A dialog will be displayed,  
allowing you to print pictures on a  
printer connected to the computer.  
A For More Information  
Consult online help for more information on using ViewNX 2.  
A Viewing the Nikon Website  
To visit the Nikon website after installing ViewNX 2, select All  
Programs > Link to Nikon from the Windows start menu (Internet  
connection required).  
Connections 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Photographs  
Selected JPEG images can be printed on a PictBridge printer  
(0 360) connected directly to the camera.  
Connecting the Printer  
Connect the camera using the supplied USB cable.  
1
2
Turn the camera off.  
Connect the USB cable.  
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable. Do not use  
force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.  
3
Turn the camera on.  
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed  
by a PictBridge playback display. To print pictures one at a  
time, proceed to page 209. To print multiple selected pictures  
or all pictures, proceed to page 211.  
D Selecting Photographs for Printing  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 85) can not be selected for printing. JPEG  
copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)  
processing option in the retouch menu (0 275).  
D Date Imprint  
If you select Print time stamp in the PictBridge menu when printing  
photographs containing date information recorded using Print date  
in the setup menu (0 254), the date will appear twice. The imprinted  
date may however be cropped out if the photographs are cropped or  
printed without a border.  
D Panoramas  
Some printers may not print panoramas, while at some settings others  
may not print entire panoramas. See the printer manual for details.  
208 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Printing Pictures One at a Time  
1
Display the desired picture.  
Press 4 or 2 to view additional pictures. Press the X button  
to zoom in on the current frame (0 182; press K to exit  
zoom). To view six pictures at a time, press the W (Q) button.  
Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X to  
display the highlighted picture full frame.  
2
Adjust printer settings.  
Press J to display the following items, then press 1 or 3 to  
highlight an item and press 2 to view options (only options  
supported by the current printer are listed; to use the default  
option, select Printer default). After selecting an option,  
press J to return to the printer settings menu.  
Option  
Description  
Page size Choose a page size.  
This option is listed only when pictures are printed  
No. of copies one at a time. Press 1 or 3 to choose number of  
copies (maximum 99).  
Border  
Choose whether to frame photos in white borders.  
Choose whether to print the times and dates of  
recordings on photos.  
Time stamp  
This option is listed only when pictures are printed  
one at a time. To exit without cropping, highlight No  
cropping and press J. To crop the current picture,  
highlight Crop and press 2. A crop selection dialog  
will be displayed; press X to increase the size of the  
crop, W (Q) to decrease, and use the multi selector to  
position the crop. Note that print quality may drop if  
small crops are printed at large sizes.  
Cropping  
Connections 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
3
Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel  
before all copies have been printed, press J.  
210 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Printing Multiple Pictures  
1
2
Display the PictBridge menu.  
Press the G button in the PictBridge playback display.  
Choose an option.  
Highlight one of the following options and press 2.  
Print select: Select pictures for printing. Use the multi selector  
to highlight pictures (to view the highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X button) and keeping the W (Q)  
button pressed, press 1 or 3 to choose the number of  
prints. To deselect a picture, set the number of prints to zero.  
Select date: Print one copy of all the pictures taken on  
selected dates. Press 1 or 3 to highlight dates and press 2  
to select or deselect. To view the pictures taken on the  
selected date, press W (Q). Use the multi selector to scroll  
through the pictures, or press and hold X to view the  
current picture full screen. Press W (Q) again to return to  
the date selection dialog.  
Print (DPOF): Print the current DPOF print order (0 213). The  
order can be viewed and modified before printing as  
described in the description for Print select, above.  
Index print: To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the  
memory card, proceed to Step 3. Note that if the memory  
card contains more than 256 pictures, only the first 256  
images will be printed. A warning will be displayed if the  
page size selected in Step 3 is too small for an index print.  
Connections 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
4
Adjust printer settings.  
Adjust printer settings as described in Step 2 on page 209.  
Start printing.  
Select Start printing and press J to start printing. To cancel  
before all copies have been printed, press J.  
212 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set  
The DPOF print order option in the playback menu is used to  
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers  
and devices that support DPOF.  
1
Choose DPOF print order > Select/  
set.  
Press the G button and select  
DPOF print order in the playback  
menu. Highlight Select/set and press  
2 (to remove all photographs from  
the print order, select Deselect all).  
G button  
2
Select pictures.  
Use the multi selector to highlight  
pictures (to view the highlighted  
picture full screen, press and hold the  
X button) and keeping the W (Q)  
button pressed, press 1 or 3 to  
choose the number of prints. To  
deselect a picture, set the number of prints to zero. Press J  
when all the desired pictures have been selected.  
Connections 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3
4
Select imprint options.  
Highlight the following options and  
press 2 to toggle the highlighted  
option on or off.  
Print shooting data: Print shutter speed  
and aperture on all pictures in print  
order.  
Print date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print  
order.  
Complete the print order.  
Press J to complete the print order.  
D DPOF Print Order  
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a  
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and  
follow the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the  
current order (0 211). DPOF print date and shooting data options are  
not supported when printing via direct USB connection; to print the  
date of recording on photographs in the current print order, use the  
PictBridge Time stamp option.  
The DPOF print order option can not be used if there is not enough  
space on the memory card to store the print order.  
NEF (RAW) photographs (0 85) can not be selected using this option.  
JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) images can be created using the NEF (RAW)  
processing option in the retouch menu (0 275).  
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a  
computer or other device after the print order is created.  
214 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Viewing Pictures on TV  
The supplied audio video (A/V) cable can be used to connect the  
camera to a television or video recorder for playback or  
recording. A High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable  
(available separately from third-party suppliers) with a mini  
HDMI connector (Type C) can be used to connect the camera to  
high-definition video devices.  
Standard Definition Devices  
Before connecting the camera to a standard television, confirm  
that the camera video standard (0 260) matches that used in  
the TV.  
1
2
Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or  
disconnecting the A/V cable.  
Connect the A/V cable as shown.  
Audio  
(white)  
Connect to camera  
Connect to  
video device  
Video  
(yellow)  
Connections 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
4
Tune the television to the video channel.  
Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the television  
screen. Note that the edges of images may not be displayed.  
A Video Mode  
If no image is displayed, check that camera is correctly connected and  
that the option selected for Video mode (0 260) matches the video  
standard used in the TV.  
A Television Playback  
Use of an AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for  
extended playback.  
216 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
High-Definition Devices  
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a third-  
party HDMI cable with a mini HDMI connector (Type C).  
1
2
Turn the camera off.  
Always turn the camera off before connecting or  
disconnecting an HDMI cable.  
Connect the HDMI cable as shown.  
Connect to camera  
Connect to high-definition device  
(choose cable with connector for HDMI  
device)  
3
4
Tune the device to the HDMI channel.  
Turn the camera on and press the K button.  
During playback, images will be displayed on the high-  
definition television or monitor screen. Note that the edges  
of images may not be displayed.  
A Playback Volume  
Volume can be adjusted using television controls; the camera controls  
can not be used.  
Connections 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ Choosing an Output Resolution  
To choose the format for images output  
to the HDMI device, select HDMI >  
Output resolution in the camera setup  
menu (0 231). If Auto is selected, the  
camera will automatically select the  
appropriate format.  
❚❚ Controlling the Camera with the TV Remote  
If On is selected for HDMI >Device control in the setup menu  
(0 231) when the camera is connected to a television that  
supports HDMI-CEC and both the camera and television are on,  
the television remote can be used in place of the camera multi  
selector and J button during full-frame playback and slide  
shows. If Off is selected, the television remote can not be used  
to control the camera, but the camera can be used to shoot  
photographs and movies in live view.  
A HDMI-CEC Devices  
HDMI-CEC (High-Definition Multimedia Interface–Consumer  
Electronics Control) is a standard that allows HDMI devices to be used  
to control peripherals to which they are connected. When the camera  
is connected to an HDMI-CEC device, ) will appear in the viewfinder  
in place of the number of exposures remaining.  
A 1920 × 1080 60p/50p  
Selecting 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920 × 1080; 50p for Movie settings  
> Frame size/frame rate may cause variations in the resolution and  
frame rate of the data output to HDMI devices during recording.  
During playback (0 162), HDMI devices will display the movie only;  
indicators will not be displayed.  
D HDMI > Output Resolution  
Movies can not be output at resolutions of 1920 × 1080; 60p or 1920  
× 1080; 50p. Some devices may not support an Output resolution  
setting of Auto; in this case, select 1080i (interlaced).  
218 Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Camera Menus  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
To display the playback menu, press G and select the D  
(playback menu) tab.  
G button  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Default  
Current  
0
193  
220  
Delete  
Playback folder  
Playback display options  
Additional photo info  
Transition effects  
Image review  
On  
On  
On  
220  
221  
221  
Rotate tall  
Slide show  
Image type  
Still images and movies  
Frame interval  
2 s  
On  
198  
Transition effects  
DPOF print order  
Rating  
213  
187  
190  
Select to send to smart device  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Playback Folder  
G button D playback menu  
Choose a folder for playback:  
Option  
Description  
Only photos in the folder currently selected for Storage  
folder in the setup menu (0 257) are displayed during  
playback. This option is selected automatically when a  
photo is taken; select All to view pictures in all folders.  
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.  
Current  
All  
Playback Display Options  
G button D playback menu  
Choose the information available in the playback photo  
information display (0 172) and the transition between frames  
during playback.  
Additional photo info: Press 1 or 3 to  
highlight and press 2 to select or  
deselect. Selected items are indicated  
by check marks. To return to the  
playback menu, press J.  
Transition effects: Choose from On (each frame is pushed out of  
the display by the following frame) and Off (no transition  
between frames).  
220 D The Playback Menu: Managing Images  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Image Review  
G button D playback menu  
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the  
monitor immediately after shooting.  
Rotate Tall  
G button D playback menu  
If On is selected, “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures will be  
automatically rotated for display in the monitor (pictures taken  
with Off selected for Auto image rotation will still be displayed  
in landscape orientation; 0 243). Note that because the camera  
itself is already in the appropriate orientation during shooting,  
images are not rotated automatically during image review.  
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
To display the shooting menu, press G and select the C  
(shooting menu) tab.  
G button  
The shooting menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Reset shooting menu  
Image quality  
Image size  
I
Default  
JPEG normal  
0
85  
Normal panorama  
88  
Other modes  
Large  
87  
White balance  
Fluorescent  
Set Picture Control  
Auto distortion control  
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
Noise reduction  
ISO sensitivity settings  
Auto  
124  
126  
135  
225  
225  
122  
226  
Cool-white fluorescent  
Standard  
Off  
sRGB  
On  
On  
P, S, A, M  
Other modes  
Auto ISO sensitivity control  
100  
Auto  
Off  
ISO sensitivity  
95  
227  
222 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Option  
n, 1, 2, 3  
Default  
0
78  
AF-area mode  
Viewfinder  
Single-point AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
Auto-area AF  
Face-priority AF  
Normal-area AF  
Wide-area AF  
On  
m
Other modes  
k, l, p, o  
n
Live view/movie  
145  
Other modes  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator  
Metering  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash  
Movie settings  
Frame size/frame rate *  
229  
114  
229  
Matrix metering  
TTL  
Normal  
Auto sensitivity  
Off  
Movie quality  
Microphone  
158,  
159  
Wind noise reduction  
Manual movie settings  
Off  
* Default varies with country of purchase.  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed  
out and unavailable.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Reset Shooting Menu  
G button C shooting menu  
Select Yes to reset shooting menu settings.  
A Reset Shooting Options  
Selecting Yes for Reset shooting menu also restores Picture Control  
settings to their default values (0 137) and resets the following:  
Option  
Default  
0
Release mode  
m
Continuous  
Single frame  
Center  
67  
Other modes  
Focus point  
Flexible program  
A (L) button hold  
Focus mode  
80  
103  
252  
Off  
Viewfinder  
Auto-servo AF  
74  
Live view/movie  
Flash mode  
Single-servo AF  
144  
i, k, p, n, S, T, g, '  
o
Auto  
Auto slow sync  
Flash off  
Fill flash  
Off  
89, 91  
U
P, S, A, M  
Exposure compensation  
Flash compensation  
118  
120  
Off  
224 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Auto Distortion Control  
G button C shooting menu  
Select On to reduce barrel distortion in  
photos taken with wide-angle lenses and  
to reduce pin-cushion distortion in  
photos taken with long lenses (note that  
the edges of the area visible in the  
viewfinder may be cropped out of the  
final photograph, and that the time  
needed to process photographs before recording begins may  
increase). This option does not apply to movies and is available  
only with type G, E, and D lenses (PC, fisheye, and certain other  
lenses excluded); results are not guaranteed with other lenses.  
Color Space  
G button C shooting menu  
The color space determines the gamut of  
colors available for color reproduction.  
sRGB is recommended for movies and  
for general-purpose printing and display,  
Adobe RGB for professional publication  
and commercial printing.  
A Adobe RGB  
For accurate color reproduction, Adobe RGB images require  
applications, displays, and printers that support color management.  
A Color Space  
ViewNX 2 (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately)  
automatically select the correct color space when opening  
photographs created with this camera. Results can not be guaranteed  
with third-party software.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Noise Reduction  
G button C shooting menu  
Select On to reduce noise (bright spots,  
randomly-spaced bright pixels, lines, or  
fog). Noise reduction takes effect at all  
ISO sensitivities, but is most noticeable at higher values. The  
time required for processing at shutter speeds slower than  
about 1 s roughly doubles; during processing, “l m” will  
flash in the viewfinder and photographs can not be taken. Noise  
reduction will not be performed if the camera is turned off  
before processing is complete.  
If Off is selected, noise reduction will only be performed as  
required; the amount of noise reduction is less than that  
performed when On is selected.  
ISO Sensitivity Settings  
G button C shooting menu  
Adjust ISO sensitivity (0 95).  
226 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
❚❚ Auto ISO Sensitivity control  
If Off is chosen for Auto ISO sensitivity control in P, S, A, and M  
modes, ISO sensitivity will remain fixed at the value selected by  
the user (0 95). When On is chosen, ISO sensitivity will  
automatically be adjusted if optimal exposure can not be  
achieved at the value selected by the user. The maximum value  
for auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum  
sensitivity option in the Auto ISO sensitivity control menu  
(choose lower values to prevent noise (randomly-spaced bright  
pixels, fog, or lines), but note that if the ISO sensitivity selected  
by the user is higher than that chosen for Maximum sensitivity,  
the value selected by the user will be used instead; the minimum  
value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO 100). In  
modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if underexposure  
would result at the shutter speed selected for Minimum shutter  
speed (1  
2000–1 s, or Auto; in modes S and M, sensitivity will be  
/
adjusted for optimal exposure at the shutter speed selected by  
the user). If Auto (available only with CPU lenses) is selected, the  
camera will choose the minimum shutter speed based on the  
focal length of the lens. Slower shutter speeds will be used only  
if optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity  
value selected for Maximum sensitivity.  
When On is selected, the viewfinder  
shows ISO-AUTO and the information  
display ISO-A. These indicators flash when  
sensitivity is altered from the value  
selected by the user.  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Maximum Sensitivity/Minimum Shutter Speed  
When auto ISO sensitivity control is enabled,  
the ISO sensitivity and shutter speed  
graphics in the information display show the  
maximum sensitivity and minimum shutter  
speed.  
Maximum sensitivity  
Minimum shutter speed  
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control  
Noise (randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) is more likely at  
higher sensitivities. Use the Noise Reduction option in the shooting  
menu to reduce noise (0 226). Note that ISO sensitivity may be raised  
automatically when auto ISO sensitivity control is used in combination  
with slow sync flash modes (available with the built-in flash and the  
optional flash units listed on page 299), possibly preventing the  
camera from selecting slow shutter speeds. Auto ISO sensitivity  
control is available only in i-TTL flash control mode (0 229, 301); in  
other modes, the value selected for ISO sensitivity will be used for  
pictures taken with the built-in flash or optional flash units.  
228 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Built-in AF-assist Illuminator  
G button C shooting menu  
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist  
illuminator lights to assist the focus  
operation when lighting is poor.  
AF-assist illuminator  
Option  
Description  
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor (for  
more information, see page 331).  
On  
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus  
operation. The camera may not be able to focus using  
autofocus when lighting is poor.  
Off  
Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash  
G button C shooting menu  
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash in P, S, A, and M  
modes.  
Option  
Description  
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to  
shooting conditions.  
1 TTL  
Choose a flash level. At full  
power, the built-in flash has  
a Guide Number of  
approximately 12/39 (m/ft.,  
ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F).  
2
Manual  
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Manual  
A Y icon flashes in the viewfinder and 0  
flashes in the information display when  
Manual is selected and the flash is raised.  
A The SB-400 and SB-300  
When an optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash unit is attached and turned  
on, Flash cntrl for built-in flash changes to Optional flash, allowing  
the flash control mode for the optional flash unit to be selected from  
TTL and Manual.  
A TTL Flash Control  
The following types of flash control are supported when a CPU lens is  
used in combination with the built-in flash (0 89) or optional flash  
units (0 299).  
i-TTL Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Information from the 420-pixel RGB  
sensor is used to adjust flash output for a natural balance between  
the main subject and the background.  
Standard i-TTL Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted for the  
main subject; the brightness of the background is not taken into  
account.  
Standard i-TTL flash control is used with spot metering or when  
selected with the optional flash unit. i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital  
SLR is used in all other cases.  
230 C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
To display the setup menu, press G and select the B (setup  
menu) tab.  
G button  
The setup menu contains the following options:  
Option  
Reset setup options  
Default  
0
234  
235  
0
Format memory card  
Monitor brightness  
Info display format  
AUTO/SCENE/EFFECTS  
P/S/A/M  
Graphic  
Graphic  
On  
236  
238  
Auto info display  
Clean image sensor  
Clean at startup/shutdown  
Lock mirror up for cleaning1  
Image Dust Off ref photo  
Flicker reduction  
Clean at startup & shutdown  
314  
317  
239  
241  
Auto  
Time zone and date 2  
Daylight saving time  
Language 2  
Off  
On  
242  
243  
243  
Auto image rotation  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Option  
Default  
Normal  
0
244  
245  
Image comment  
Auto off timers  
Self-timer  
Self-timer delay  
Number of shots  
10 s  
1
246  
Remote on duration (ML-L3)  
Beep  
Rangefinder  
File number sequence  
Buttons  
1 min  
Low  
Off  
247  
247  
248  
249  
Off  
Assign Fn button  
Assign AE-L/AF-L button  
Slot empty release lock  
Print date  
ISO sensitivity  
AE/AF lock  
Off  
Release locked  
Off  
251  
252  
253  
254  
257  
Storage folder  
Accessory terminal  
Remote control  
Remote shutter release  
Assign Fn button  
Location data  
Standby timer  
Set clock from satellite  
Take photos  
Same as camera 4 button  
258  
259  
Enable  
Yes  
232 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Option  
Default  
0
Video mode 2  
HDMI  
260  
Output resolution  
Device control  
Auto  
On  
218  
Wireless mobile adapter  
Eye-Fi upload 3  
Firmware version  
Enable  
Enable  
260  
261  
262  
1 Not available when battery is low.  
2 Default varies with country of purchase.  
3 Only available when compatible Eye-Fi memory card is inserted  
(0 261).  
Note: Depending on camera settings, some items may be grayed  
Reset Setup Options  
G button B setup menu  
Select Yes to reset all setup menu settings except Time zone  
and date, Language, Storage folder, and Video mode to the  
defaults listed above.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Format Memory Card  
G button B setup menu  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use or after being  
formatted in other devices. Format the card as described below.  
D Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may  
contain. Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to  
keep to a computer before proceeding (0 204).  
1
Highlight Yes.  
To exit without formatting  
the memory card, highlight  
No and press J.  
2
Press J.  
A message will be displayed  
while the card is formatted.  
Do not remove the memory  
card or remove or disconnect  
the power source until  
formatting is complete.  
234 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Monitor Brightness  
G button B setup menu  
Press 1 or 3 to choose monitor  
brightness. Choose higher values for  
increased brightness, lower values for  
reduced brightness.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Info Display Format  
G button B setup menu  
Choose an information display format (0 7). Formats can be  
chosen separately for auto, scene, and special effects modes and  
for P, S, A, and M modes.  
Classic (0 237)  
Graphic (0 7)  
1
2
Select a shooting mode  
option.  
Highlight AUTO/SCENE/  
EFFECTS or P/S/A/M and  
press 2.  
Select a design.  
Highlight a design and press  
J.  
236 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The “Classic” display is shown below.  
1 Eye-Fi connection  
10 Help icon ................................11, 336  
indicator ...................................... 261  
11 Image quality .................................85  
12 Image size .......................................87  
13 White balance ............................. 124  
14 Flash mode .............................. 90, 92  
15 ISO sensitivity................................ 95  
16 Exposure compensation........... 118  
17 Flash compensation .................. 120  
18 Metering....................................... 114  
19 AF-area mode........................78, 145  
20 Focus mode ...........................74, 144  
2 Satellite signal indicator ........... 260  
3 Print date indicator .................... 254  
4 Flash control indicator............... 229  
Flash compensation indicator for  
optional flash units................... 304  
5 Active D-Lighting ....................... 122  
6 Picture Control ........................... 135  
7 Release mode.................................67  
8 “Beep” indicator.......................... 247  
9 Battery indicator............................21  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
21 Autoexposure (AE) lock indicator 26 “k” (appears when memory  
.......................................................116  
remains for over 1000 exposures)  
......................................................... 19  
22 Shooting mode  
i auto/  
27 Number of exposures remaining  
......................................................... 19  
White balance recording  
j auto (flash off).................... 25  
Scene modes............................ 47  
P, S, A, and M modes.............100  
28 ISO sensitivity ................................ 95  
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator  
23 Shutter speed ..............................101  
....................................................... 227  
24 Aperture (f-number) ..................101  
29 Auto-area AF indicator................ 78  
3D-tracking indicator .................. 78  
Focus point..................................... 80  
25 Exposure indicator......................109  
Exposure compensation  
indicator.......................................119  
Note: Display shown with all indicators lit for illustrative purposes.  
Auto Info Display  
G button B setup menu  
If On is selected, the information display will appear after the  
shutter-release button is pressed halfway. If Off is selected, the  
information display can be viewed by pressing the R button.  
238 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Image Dust Off Ref Photo  
G button B setup menu  
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the  
Capture NX 2 manual).  
Image Dust Off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is  
mounted on the camera. A lens with a focal length of at least  
50 mm is recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the  
way in.  
1
Choose a start option.  
Highlight one of the  
following options and press  
J. To exit without  
acquiring image dust off  
data, press G.  
Start: The message shown at right  
will be displayed and “rEF” will  
appear in the viewfinder.  
Clean sensor and then start: Select this  
option to clean the image sensor  
before starting. The message shown  
at right will be displayed and “rEF”  
will appear in the viewfinder when  
cleaning is complete.  
D Image Sensor Cleaning  
Image Dust Off reference data recorded before image sensor  
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken  
after image sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and  
then start only if the Image Dust Off reference data will not be  
used with existing photographs.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2
3
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.  
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a well-  
lit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;  
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.  
Acquire Image Dust Off reference data.  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data.  
If the reference object is too bright or  
too dark, the camera may be unable to  
acquire Image Dust Off reference data  
and the message shown at right will  
be displayed. Choose another  
reference object and repeat the  
process from step 1.  
D Image Dust Off Reference Data  
The same reference data can be used for  
photographs taken with different lenses or  
at different apertures. Reference images can  
not be viewed using computer imaging  
software. A grid pattern is displayed when  
reference images are viewed on the camera.  
240 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flicker Reduction  
G button B setup menu  
Reduce flicker and banding when shooting under fluorescent or  
mercury-vapor lighting during live view (0 142) or movie  
recording (0 155). Choose Auto to allow the camera to  
automatically choose the correct frequency, or manually match  
the frequency to that of the local AC power supply.  
A Flicker Reduction  
If Auto fails to produce the desired results and you are unsure as to the  
frequency of the local power supply, test both options and choose the  
one that produces the best results. Flicker reduction may not produce  
the desired results if the subject is very bright, in which case you  
should select mode A or M and choose a smaller aperture (higher  
f-number) before starting live view. Note that flicker reduction is not  
available when On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie  
settings (0 159) in mode M.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Time Zone and Date  
G button B setup menu  
Change time zones, set the camera  
clock, choose the date display order,  
and turn daylight saving time on or off.  
Option  
Description  
Choose a time zone. The  
camera clock is  
automatically set to the time  
in the new time zone.  
Time zone  
Set the camera clock (0 18).  
Date and time  
Date format  
Choose the order in which  
the day, month, and year are  
displayed.  
Turn daylight saving time on  
or off. The camera clock will  
automatically be advanced  
or set back one hour.  
Daylight  
saving time  
242 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Language  
G button B setup menu  
Choose a language for camera menus and messages.  
Auto Image Rotation  
G button B setup menu  
Photographs taken while On is selected contain information on  
camera orientation, allowing them to be rotated automatically  
during playback or when viewed in ViewNX 2 or Capture NX 2  
(available separately). The following orientations are recorded:  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counterclockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected.  
Choose this option when panning or taking photographs with  
the lens pointing up or down.  
A Rotate Tall  
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for  
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the  
playback menu (0 221).  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Image Comment  
G button B setup menu  
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.  
Comments can be viewed as metadata in ViewNX 2 (supplied) or  
Capture NX 2 (available separately; 0 307). The comment is also  
visible on the shooting data page in the photo information  
display (0 177). The following options are available:  
Input comment: Input a comment as described below.  
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.  
Attach comment: Select this option to  
attach the comment to all subsequent  
photographs. Attach comment can  
be turned on and off by highlighting it  
and pressing 2. After choosing the  
desired setting, press J to exit.  
A Text Entry  
The dialog at right is displayed when text  
entry is required. Use the multi selector to  
highlight the desired character in the  
keyboard area and press J to insert the  
highlighted character at the current cursor  
position (note that if a character is entered  
when the field is full, the last character in the  
field will be deleted). To delete the character  
under the cursor, press the O button. To  
move the cursor to a new position, rotate the  
command dial. To complete entry and return  
Keyboard area  
Text display area  
to the previous menu, press X. To exit without completing text entry,  
press G.  
244 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Auto off Timers  
G button B setup menu  
This option determines how long the monitor remains on if no  
operations are performed during menu display and playback  
(Playback/menus), while photographs are displayed in the  
monitor after shooting (Image review), and during live view  
(Live view), and how long the standby timer, viewfinder, and  
information display remain on when no operations are  
performed (Standby timer). Choose shorter auto-off delays to  
reduce the drain on the battery.  
Option  
Description (all times are approximate)  
Auto off timers are set to the following values:  
Playback/  
menus  
20 s  
1 min.  
5 min.  
Image  
review  
4 s  
4 s  
20 s  
Standby  
timer  
4 s  
8 s  
1 min.  
Live view  
C Short  
D Normal  
E Long  
Short  
Normal  
Long  
5 min.  
10 min.  
20 min.  
Choose separate delays for Playback/menus, Image  
F Custom review, Live view, and Standby timer. When settings  
are complete, press J.  
A Auto off Timers  
The monitor and viewfinder will not turn off automatically when the  
camera is connected to a computer or printer via USB.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Self-Timer  
G button B setup menu  
Choose the length of the shutter release  
delay and the number of shots taken.  
Self-timer delay: Choose the length of  
the shutter-release delay.  
Number of shots: Press 1 and 3 to  
choose the number of shots taken  
each time the shutter-release button is  
pressed (from 1 to 9; if a value other  
than 1 is selected, shots will be taken  
at intervals of about 4 seconds).  
246 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Remote on Duration (ML-L3)  
G button B setup menu  
Choose how long the camera will wait for  
a signal from the optional ML-L3 remote  
control before cancelling remote release  
mode. Choose shorter times for longer  
battery life. This setting applies only  
during viewfinder photography.  
Beep  
G button B setup menu  
Choose the pitch (High or Low) of the beep that sounds when  
the camera focuses and in self-timer and remote-control modes.  
Select Off to prevent the beep from sounding.  
The current setting is shown in the  
information display: 3 is displayed when  
the beep is on, 2 when it is off.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Rangefinder  
G button B setup menu  
Choose On to use the exposure indicator to determine whether  
the camera is correctly focused in manual focus mode (0 83;  
note that this function is not available in shooting mode M, when  
the exposure indicator instead shows whether the subject is  
correctly exposed).  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject in focus.  
Focus point is slightly in front of subject.  
Focus point is well in front of subject.  
Focus point is slightly behind subject.  
Focus point is well behind subject.  
Camera can not determine correct focus.  
A Using the Electronic Rangefinder  
The electronic rangefinder requires a lens with a maximum aperture of  
f/5.6 or faster. The desired results may not be achieved in situations in  
which the camera would be unable to focus using autofocus (0 76).  
The electronic rangefinder is not available during live view.  
248 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
File Number Sequence  
G button B setup menu  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by  
adding 1 to the last file number used. This option controls  
whether file numbering continues from the last number used  
when a new folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a  
new memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Option  
Description  
When a new folder is created, the memory card formatted, or  
a new memory card inserted in the camera, file numbering  
continues from the last number used. If a photograph is  
taken when the current folder contains a photograph  
numbered 9999, a new folder will be created automatically  
and file numbering will begin again from 0001.  
On  
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is created,  
the memory card is formatted, or a new memory card is  
inserted in the camera. Note that a new folder is created  
automatically if a photograph is taken when the current  
folder contains 999 photographs.  
Off  
Resets the file numbering for On to 0001 and creates a new  
folder with the next photograph taken.  
Reset  
D File Number Sequence  
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999  
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release  
button will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken.  
Choose Reset for File number sequence and then either format the  
current memory card or insert a new memory card.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form  
“DSC_nnnn.xxx,where nnnn is a four-digit number between 0001 and  
9999 assigned automatically in ascending order by the camera, and  
xxx is one of the following three-letter extensions: “NEF” for NEF (RAW)  
images, “JPG” for JPEG images, or “MOV” for movies. The NEF and JPEG  
files recorded at a setting of NEF (RAW)+JPEG have the same file names  
but different extensions. Copies created with image overlay (0 272)  
and movie edit options (0 164) have file names beginning with  
“DSC_” ; copies created with the other options in the retouch menu  
have file names beginning with “CSC” (e.g., “CSC_0001.JPG”). Images  
recorded with the Color space option in the shooting menu set to  
Adobe RGB (0 225) have names that begin with an underscore (e.g.,  
“_DSC0001.JPG”).  
250 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Buttons  
G button B setup menu  
❚❚ Assign Fn Button  
Choose the role played by the Fn button.  
Fn button  
Option  
Description  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the  
command dial to select image quality and size  
(0 85).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the  
command dial to select ISO sensitivity (0 95).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the  
Image quality/  
size  
v
w
ISO sensitivity  
m
White balance command dial to select white balance (P, S, A, and M  
modes only; 0 124).  
Keeping the Fn button pressed, rotate the  
command dial to select Active D-Lighting (P, S, A,  
and M modes only; 0 122).  
Active  
D-Lighting  
!
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
❚❚ Assign AE-L/AF-L Button  
Choose the role played by the A (L)  
button.  
A (L) button  
Option  
Description  
Focus and exposure lock while the A (L) button  
is pressed.  
Exposure locks while the A (L) button is  
pressed.  
B
C
AE/AF lock  
AE lock only  
Exposure locks when the A (L) button is  
pressed, and remains locked until the button is  
pressed a second time or the standby timer  
expires.  
E
AE lock (Hold)  
F
AF lock only  
AF-ON  
Focus locks while the A (L) button is pressed.  
The A (L) button initiates autofocus. The  
shutter-release button can not be used to focus.  
A
❚❚ Shutter-Release Button AE-L  
If On is selected, exposure will lock when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
252 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Slot Empty Release Lock  
G button B setup menu  
If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release button is only  
enabled when a memory card is inserted in the camera.  
Selecting Enable release allows the shutter to be released when  
no memory card is inserted, although no pictures will be  
recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in  
demo mode).  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Print Date  
G button B setup menu  
Choose the date information imprinted on photographs as they  
are taken. Date imprints can not be added to or removed from  
existing photos.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
The time and date do not appear on photographs.  
The date or date and  
time are imprinted on  
10.15. 2013  
a
Date  
photographs taken  
10.15.2013 10:02  
while this option is in  
effect.  
Date and  
time  
b
New photos are imprinted with a time stamp  
showing the number of days between the date of  
shooting and a selected date (see below).  
Date  
counter  
c
At settings other than Off, the selected  
option is indicated by a d icon in the  
information display.  
A Print Date  
The date is recorded in the order selected for Time zone and date  
(0 242). The imprinted data may be cropped out or rendered illegible  
in copies created when images are retouched (0 263). The date does  
not appear on panoramas or on NEF (RAW) or NEF (RAW)+JPEG  
images.  
254 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
❚❚ Date Counter  
Pictures taken while this option is in  
effect are imprinted with the number of  
days remaining until a future date or the  
number of days elapsed since a past date.  
Use it to track the growth of a child or  
count down the days until a birthday or  
wedding.  
02 / 10.20.2013  
02 / 10.24.2013  
Future date  
Past date  
(two days remaining)  
(two days elapsed)  
The camera offers three slots for storing dates.  
1
Enter the first date.  
The first time you select Date counter,  
you will be prompted to enter a date  
for the first slot. Enter a date using the  
multi selector and press J to exit to  
the date list.  
2
Enter additional dates or edit  
existing dates.  
To change a date or enter additional  
dates, highlight a slot, press 2, and  
enter a date as described above.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3
4
Choose a date.  
Highlight a slot in the date list and  
press J.  
Choose a date counter format.  
Highlight Display options and press  
2, then highlight a date format and  
press J.  
5
Exit the date counter menu.  
Press J to exit the date counter menu.  
256 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Storage Folder  
G button B setup menu  
Create, rename, or delete folders, or choose the folder in which  
subsequent photographs will be stored.  
Select folder: Choose the folder in which subsequent  
photographs will be stored.  
Current folder  
D3300 (default  
folder)  
Other folders (in  
alphabetical order)  
New: Create a new folder and name it as described on page  
244. Folder names can be up to five characters long.  
Rename: Select a folder from the list and rename it as described  
on page 244.  
Delete: Delete all empty folders on the memory card.  
D Folder Names  
On the memory card, folder names are preceded by a three-digit folder  
number assigned automatically by the camera (e.g., 100D3300). Each  
folder can contain up to 999 photographs. During shooting, pictures  
are stored in the highest-numbered folder with the selected name. If a  
photograph is taken when the current folder is full or contains a  
photograph numbered 9999, the camera will create a new folder by  
adding 1 to the current folder number (e.g., 101D3300). The camera  
treats folders with the same name but different folder numbers as the  
same folder. For example, if the folder NIKON is selected for Storage  
folder, photographs in all folders named NIKON (100NIKON,  
101NIKON, 102NIKON, etc.) will be visible when Current is selected for  
Playback folder (0 220). Renaming changes all folders with the same  
name but leaves the folder numbers intact. Selecting Delete deletes  
empty numbered folders but leaves other folders with the same name  
intact.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Accessory Terminal  
G button B setup menu  
Choose the role of the optional accessory connected to the  
accessory terminal.  
❚❚ Remote Control  
Choose the functions performed using a remote cord or wireless  
remote controller (0 308, 309).  
Remote Shutter Release  
Choose whether the shutter-release button on the optional  
accessory is used for photography or movie recording.  
Option  
Description  
The shutter-release button on the optional  
accessory is used to take photographs.  
The shutter-release button on the optional  
accessory is used for movie recording. Press the  
button halfway to start live view or to focus in AF-S  
and AF-F modes. Press the button all the way down  
to start or end recording. Use the camera a  
button to end live view.  
y
z
Take photos  
Record  
movies  
Assign Fn button  
Choose the role played by the Fn buttons on wireless remote  
controllers.  
Option  
Same as  
=4 camera 4  
button  
Description  
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller  
performs the function currently assigned to the  
camera A (L) button (0 252).  
The Fn button on the wireless remote controller  
can be used to start and end live view.  
a
Live view  
258 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
❚❚ Location Data  
This item is used to adjust settings for optional GP-1 or GP-1A  
GPS units (0 309). The unit can be connected to the camera’s  
accessory terminal (0 309) using the cable supplied with the  
device, allowing information on the camera’s current position to  
be recorded when photographs are taken (turn the camera off  
before connecting the unit; for more information, see the  
manual provided with the device).  
The Location data menu contains the options listed below.  
Standby timer: Choose whether the exposure meters turn off  
automatically when the unit is attached.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure meters turn off automatically if no operations  
are performed for the time selected for Auto off timers >  
Standby timer in the setup menu (0 245; to allow the  
Enable camera time to acquire location data, the delay is  
extended by up to one minute after standby timer is  
activated or the camera is turned on). This reduces the  
drain on the battery.  
Exposure meters do not turn off while the unit is  
connected.  
Disable  
Position: This item is only available if a GP-1 or GP-1A is  
connected, when it displays the current latitude, longitude,  
altitude, and Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) as reported by  
the unit.  
Set clock from satellite: Choose Yes to set the camera clock based  
on the time provided by the satellite navigation system.  
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)  
UTC data is provided by the location data satellite system and is  
independent of the camera clock.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A The Satellite Signal Indicator  
Connection status is shown as follows:  
% (static): The camera has established  
communication with the GPS unit.  
% (flashing): The unit is searching for a  
signal. Pictures taken while the icon is  
flashing do not include location data.  
No icon: No new location data have been  
received from the unit for at least two  
seconds. Pictures taken when the % icon is not displayed do not  
include location data.  
Video Mode  
G button B setup menu  
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR, be sure the  
camera video mode matches the device video standard (NTSC or  
PAL).  
Wireless Mobile Adapter  
G button B setup menu  
Choose whether the camera will establish wireless connections  
with smart devices when an optional WU-1a wireless mobile  
adapter (0 309) is attached to the camera USB and A/V  
connector.  
Option  
Description  
Enable wireless connections to smart devices running the  
Wireless Mobile Utility.  
Enable  
Disable wireless connections to smart devices. Choose  
this option in locations where the use of wireless devices  
is prohibited. Selecting this option also reduces the drain  
on the camera battery.  
Disable  
260 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Eye-Fi Upload  
G button B setup menu  
This option is displayed only when an Eye-Fi memory card  
(available separately from third-party suppliers) is inserted in the  
camera. Choose Enable to upload photographs to a preselected  
destination. Note that pictures will not be uploaded if signal  
strength is insufficient.  
Observe all local laws concerning wireless devices and choose  
Disable where wireless devices are prohibited.  
When an Eye-Fi card is inserted, its status  
is indicated by an icon in the information  
display:  
d: Eye-Fi upload disabled.  
e: Eye-Fi upload enabled but no  
pictures available for upload.  
f (static): Eye-Fi upload enabled;  
waiting to begin upload.  
f (animated): Eye-Fi upload enabled; uploading data.  
g: Error.  
D Eye-Fi Cards  
Whether due to errors or other causes, Eye-Fi cards may emit wireless  
signals when Disable is selected. If a warning is displayed in the  
monitor (0 337), turn the camera off and remove the card.  
The camera can be used to turn Eye-Fi cards on and off, but may not  
support other Eye-Fi functions. Be sure to keep the card firmware  
updated. See the documentation provided with the Eye-Fi card for  
more information; for information on the availability of Eye-Fi cards in  
your country or region, contact the manufacturer.  
Eye-Fi cards can not be used to upload photographs when an optional  
WU-1a wireless mobile adapter is connected.  
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
A Using Eye-Fi Cards in Ad Hoc Mode  
Additional time may be required when connecting using Eye-Fi cards  
that support ad hoc mode. Select longer values for Auto off timers >  
Standby timer in the setup menu (0 245).  
Firmware Version  
G button B setup menu  
View the current camera firmware version.  
262 B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
To display the retouch menu, press G and select the N  
(retouch menu) tab.  
G button  
The retouch menu is used to create trimmed or retouched  
copies of the photographs on the memory card, and is only  
available when a memory card containing photographs is  
inserted in the camera.  
Option  
D-Lighting  
Red-eye correction  
Trim  
Monochrome  
Filter effects  
0
Option  
Distortion control  
Fisheye  
Color outline  
Photo illustration  
Color sketch  
Perspective control  
Miniature effect  
Selective color  
Edit movie  
0
i
j
k
266  
267  
268  
269  
270  
271  
272  
275  
277  
(
)
q
U
280  
280  
281  
281  
282  
282  
283  
284  
286  
l
m
g
r
u
3
n Color balance  
o
0
1
2
e
Image overlay  
NEF (RAW) processing  
Resize  
Quick retouch  
Straighten  
f
279 p Side-by-side comparison *  
279  
* Available only if retouch menu is displayed by pressing P and selecting  
Retouch in full-frame playback when a retouched image or original is  
displayed.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Creating Retouched Copies  
To create a retouched copy:  
1
Display retouch options.  
Highlight the desired item  
in the retouch menu and  
press 2.  
2
Select a picture.  
Highlight a picture and  
press J (to view the  
highlighted picture full  
screen, press and hold the X  
button).  
A Retouch  
The camera may not be able to display or retouch images created  
with other devices. If the image was recorded at image quality  
settings of NEF (RAW) + JPEG (0 85), retouch options apply only to  
the RAW copy.  
3
Select retouch options.  
For more information, see the section  
for the selected item. To exit without  
creating a retouched copy, press G.  
264 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Create a retouched copy.  
Press J to create a  
retouched copy. Except in  
the photo information  
“image only” page (0 172),  
retouched copies are  
indicated by a N icon.  
A Creating Retouched Copies During Playback  
To create a retouched copy of the picture currently displayed in full-  
frame playback (0 170), press P, then highlight Retouch and press J  
and select a retouch option (Image overlay excluded).  
A Retouching Copies  
Most options can be applied to copies created using other retouch  
options, although with the exceptions of Image overlay and Edit  
movie > Choose start/end point, each option can be applied only  
once (note that multiple edits may result in loss of detail). Options that  
can not be applied to the current image are grayed out and  
unavailable.  
A Image Quality and Size  
Except in the case of copies created with Trim and Resize, copies  
created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as the original,  
while copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large  
fine-quality JPEG images.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
D-Lighting  
G button N retouch menu  
D-Lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit  
photographs.  
Before  
D-Lighting  
D-Lighting  
(portrait subject)  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of correction performed; the  
effect can be previewed in the edit display. Press J to copy the  
photograph.  
❚❚ Portrait Subjects  
Select Portrait subjects to restrict D-Lighting to portrait  
subjects.  
A Portrait Subjects  
The camera automatically selects up to three subjects for portrait  
D-Lighting (note that portrait D-Lighting can not be applied to photos  
taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation in the setup menu;  
0 243). Depending on composition and how the subjects are posed,  
the desired results may not be achieved; if you are not satisfied,  
remove the check from Portrait subjects.  
266 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Red-Eye Correction  
G button N retouch menu  
This option is used to correct “red-eye” caused by the flash, and  
is available only with photographs taken using the flash. The  
photograph selected for red-eye correction can be previewed in  
the edit display. Confirm the effects of red-eye correction and  
press J to create a copy. Note that red-eye correction may not  
always produce the expected results and may in very rare  
circumstances be applied to portions of the image that are not  
affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before  
proceeding.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Trim  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a cropped copy of the selected  
photograph. The selected photograph is  
displayed with the selected crop shown  
in yellow; create a cropped copy as  
described in the following table.  
To  
Use  
Description  
Press the X button to increase the size of  
the crop.  
Increase size of crop  
X
Press the W (Q) button to reduce the size of  
the crop.  
Reduce size of crop W (Q)  
Rotate the command dial to switch  
between aspect ratios of 3 : 2, 4 : 3, 5 : 4,  
1 : 1, and 16 : 9.  
Change crop aspect  
ratio  
Move crop  
Create copy  
Use multi selector to position the crop.  
Save the current crop as a separate file.  
A Image Size  
The size of the copy (which varies with crop size and aspect ratio)  
appears at upper left in the crop display.  
A Viewing Cropped Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when cropped copies are  
displayed.  
268 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Monochrome  
G button N retouch menu  
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,  
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white  
monochrome).  
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype displays a  
preview of the selected image; press 1  
to increase color saturation, 3 to  
decrease. Press J to create a  
monochrome copy.  
Increase saturation  
Decrease saturation  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Filter Effects  
G button N retouch menu  
After adjusting filter effects as described below, press J to copy  
the photograph.  
Option  
Description  
Creates the effect of a skylight filter, making the picture  
less blue.  
Skylight  
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the  
copy a “warm” red cast.  
Warm filter  
Intensify reds (Red  
Red  
intensifier), greens (Green  
intensifier), or blues (Blue  
intensifier). Press 1 to  
increase the effect, 3 to  
decrease.  
intensifier  
Green  
intensifier  
Blue  
intensifier  
Add starburst effects to light  
sources.  
Number of points: Choose from  
four, six, or eight.  
Filter amount: Choose the  
brightness of the light  
sources affected.  
Cross screen  
Filter angle: Choose the angle of the points.  
Length of points: Choose the length of points.  
Confirm: Preview the effects of the filter. Press X to  
preview the copy full frame.  
Save: Create a retouched copy.  
Add a soft filter effect. Press 4  
or 2 to choose the filter  
strength.  
Soft  
270 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Color Balance  
G button N retouch menu  
Use the multi selector to create a copy  
with modified color balance as shown  
below. Red, green, and blue histograms  
(0 174) show the distribution of tones in  
the copy.  
Increase amount of green  
Create retouched copy  
Increase amount of blue  
Increase amount of amber  
Increase amount of magenta  
A Zoom  
To zoom in on the image displayed in the  
monitor, press the X button. The histogram  
will be updated to show data only for the  
portion of the image displayed in the  
monitor. While the image is zoomed in,  
press the A (L) button to toggle back and  
forth between color balance and zoom.  
When zoom is selected, you can zoom in and out with the X and W (Q)  
buttons and scroll the image with the multi selector.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Image Overlay  
G button N retouch menu  
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to  
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;  
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image  
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in an imaging  
application. The new picture is saved at current image quality  
and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality  
and size (0 85, 87; all options are available). To create an NEF  
(RAW) copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).  
+
1
Select Image overlay.  
Highlight Image overlay in  
the retouch menu and press  
2.  
The dialog shown at right  
will be displayed, with Image 1  
highlighted; press J to display a list  
of the NEF (RAW) pictures created  
with this camera.  
272 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
Select the first image.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight the first  
photograph in the overlay.  
To view the highlighted  
photograph full frame,  
press and hold the X  
button. Press J to select the highlighted photograph and  
return to the preview display.  
3
4
Select the second image.  
The selected image will appear as Image 1. Highlight  
Image 2 and press J, then select the second photo as  
described in Step 2.  
Adjust gain.  
Highlight Image 1 or Image  
2 and optimize exposure for  
the overlay by pressing 1 or  
3 to select gain from values  
between 0.1 and 2.0.  
Repeat for the second  
image. The default value is 1.0; select 0.5 to halve gain or 2.0  
to double it. The effects of gain are visible in the Preview  
column.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
6
Preview the overlay.  
Press 4 or 2 to place the  
cursor in the Preview  
column and press 1 or 3 to  
highlight Overlay. Press J  
to preview the overlay as  
shown at right (to save the  
overlay without displaying a preview, select Save). To return  
to Step 4 and select new photos or adjust gain, press W (Q).  
Save the overlay.  
Press J while the preview is  
displayed to save the  
overlay. After an overlay is  
created, the resulting image  
will be displayed full-frame  
in the monitor.  
D Image Overlay  
The overlay has the same photo info as the photograph selected for  
Image 1.  
274 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
NEF (RAW) Processing  
Create JPEG copies of NEF (RAW) photographs.  
G button N retouch menu  
1
Select NEF (RAW)  
processing.  
Highlight NEF (RAW)  
processing in the retouch  
menu and press 2 to  
display a picture selection  
dialog listing only NEF  
(RAW) images created with this camera.  
2
Select a photograph.  
Use the multi selector to  
highlight a photograph (to  
view the highlighted  
photograph full frame,  
press and hold the X  
button). Press J to select  
the highlighted photograph and proceed to the next step.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Adjust NEF (RAW) processing settings.  
Adjust the settings listed below. Note that white balance is  
not available with pictures created with image overlay, and  
that the effects of exposure compensation may differ from  
those that might have been expected when the photograph  
was taken.  
Image quality (0 85)  
Image size (0 87)  
White balance (0 124)  
Exposure compensation  
(0 118)  
Picture Control (0 135)  
High ISO NR  
Color space (0 225)  
D-Lighting (0 266)  
4
Copy the photograph.  
Highlight EXE and press J  
to create a JPEG copy of the  
selected photograph. To  
exit without copying the  
photograph, press the G  
button.  
276 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Resize  
Create small copies of one or more selected photographs.  
G button N retouch menu  
1
Select Resize.  
Highlight Resize in the  
retouch menu and press 2.  
2
Choose a size.  
Highlight Choose size and  
press 2.  
Highlight an option and  
press J.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
3
Choose pictures.  
Highlight Select image and  
press 2.  
Highlight pictures using the  
multi selector and press the W (Q)  
button to select or deselect (to view  
the highlighted picture full screen,  
press and hold the X button).  
Selected pictures are marked by a 1  
icon. Press J when the selection is  
complete.  
W (Q) button  
4
Save the resized copies.  
A confirmation dialog will  
be displayed. Highlight Yes  
and press J to save the  
resized copies.  
A Viewing Resized Copies  
Playback zoom may not be available when resized copies are  
displayed.  
278 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Quick Retouch  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies with enhanced saturation  
and contrast. D-Lighting is applied as  
required to brighten dark or backlit  
subjects.  
Press 4 or 2 to choose the amount of  
enhancement. Press J to copy the  
photograph.  
Straighten  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a straightened copy of the  
selected image. Press 2 to rotate the  
image clockwise by up to five degrees in  
increments of approximately 0.25  
degrees, 4 to rotate it counterclockwise  
(note that edges of the image will be  
trimmed to create a rectangular copy).  
Press J to save the retouched copy.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Distortion Control  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies with reduced peripheral  
distortion. Select Auto to let the camera  
correct distortion automatically and then  
make fine adjustments using the multi  
selector, or select Manual to reduce  
distortion manually (note that Auto is  
not available with photos taken using  
auto distortion control; see page 225).  
Press 2 to reduce barrel distortion, 4 to reduce pin-cushion  
distortion (note that greater amounts of distortion control result  
in more of the edges being cropped out). Press J to save the  
retouched copy.  
D Auto  
Auto is for use only with pictures taken with type G, E, and D lenses  
(PC, fisheye, and certain other lenses excluded); results are not  
guaranteed with other lenses.  
Fisheye  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies that appear to have been  
taken with a fisheye lens. Press 2 to  
increase the effect (this also increases the  
amount that will be cropped out at the  
edges of the image), 4 to reduce it. Press  
J to save the retouched copy.  
280 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Color Outline  
G button N retouch menu  
Create an outline copy of a photograph  
to use as a base for painting. Press J to  
save the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
Photo Illustration  
G button N retouch menu  
Sharpen outlines and simplify coloring  
for a poster effect. Press 2or 4to make  
outlines thicker or thinner. Press J to  
save the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Color Sketch  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a copy of a photograph that  
resembles a sketch made with colored  
pencils. Press 1or 3to highlight  
Vividness or Outlines and press 4or 2  
to change. Vividness can be increased to  
make colors more saturated, or  
decreased for a washed-out,  
monochromatic effect, while outlines can be made thicker or  
thinner. Thicker outlines make colors more saturated. Press J  
to save the retouched copy.  
Perspective Control  
G button N retouch menu  
Create copies that reduce the effects of  
perspective taken from the base of a tall  
object. Use the multi selector to adjust  
perspective (note that greater amounts  
of perspective control result in more of  
the edges being cropped out). Press J  
to save the retouched copy.  
Before  
After  
282 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Miniature Effect  
G button N retouch menu  
Create a copy that appears to be a photo of a diorama. Works  
best with photos taken from a high vantage point. The area that  
will be in focus in the copy is indicated by a yellow frame.  
To  
Choose  
orientation  
Press  
Description  
Press W (Q) to choose orientation of area that is  
in focus.  
W (Q)  
If area of effect is in  
wide orientation, press  
1or 3 to position  
frame showing area of  
copy that will be in  
focus.  
Choose area in  
focus  
Area in focus  
If area of effect is in tall  
orientation, press 4or  
2 to position frame  
showing area of copy  
that will be in focus.  
If area of effect is in wide orientation, press 4or  
2to choose height.  
Choose size  
Create copy  
If area of effect is in tall orientation, press 1or 3  
to choose width.  
Create copy.  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Selective Color  
Create a copy in which only selected hues appear in color.  
G button N retouch menu  
1
Select Selective color.  
Highlight Selective color in  
the retouch menu and press  
2.  
2
Select a photograph.  
Highlight a photograph and  
press J (to view the  
highlighted photograph full  
frame, press and hold the X  
button).  
3
Select a color.  
Use the multi selector to position the  
cursor over an object and press A  
(L) to select the color of the object  
as one that will remain in the final  
copy (the camera may have difficulty  
detecting unsaturated colors; choose  
a saturated color). To zoom in on the  
picture for precise color selection,  
press X. Press W (Q) to zoom out.  
A (L) button  
Selected color  
284 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4
5
Highlight the color range.  
Rotate the command dial to  
highlight the color range for  
the selected color.  
Color range  
Choose the color range.  
Press 1or 3to increase or  
decrease the range of  
similar hues that will be  
included in the final  
photograph. Choose from  
values between 1 and 7;  
note that higher values may include hues from other colors.  
6
Select additional colors.  
To select additional colors,  
rotate the command dial to  
highlight another of the  
three color boxes at the top  
of the display and repeat  
Steps 3–5 to select another  
color. Repeat for a third color if desired. To deselect the  
highlighted color, press O (To remove all colors, press and  
hold O. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; select Yes).  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
Save the edited copy.  
Press J to copy the  
photograph.  
Side-by-side Comparison  
G button N retouch menu  
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs. This  
option is only available if the retouch menu is displayed by  
pressing the P button and selecting Retouch when a copy or  
original is played back full frame.  
1
Select a picture.  
Select a retouched copy (shown by a  
N icon) or a photograph that has  
been retouched in full-frame  
playback. Press P, then highlight  
Retouch and press J.  
P button  
286 N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
2
3
Select Side-by-side  
comparison.  
Highlight Side-by-side  
comparison in the retouch  
menu and press J.  
Compare the copy with the  
original.  
Options used to create  
copy  
The source image is  
displayed on the left, the  
retouched copy on the  
right, with the options used  
to create the copy listed at  
the top of the display. Press  
4or 2to switch between  
the source image and the  
retouched copy. To view  
Source  
image  
Retouched  
copy  
the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X  
button. If the copy was created from two images using  
Image overlay, press 1or 3to view the other source image.  
If multiple copies exist for the current source image, press 1  
or 3to view the other copies. Press J to return to playback  
with the highlighted image displayed.  
DSide-by-side comparison  
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a  
photograph that has since been deleted or that was protected when  
the copy was made (0184).  
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
m Recent Settings  
To display the recent settings menu, press G and select the m  
(recent settings) tab.  
G button  
The recent settings menu lists the 20  
most recently used settings. Press 1or  
3to highlight an option and press 2to  
select.  
ARemoving Items from the Recent Settings Menu  
To remove an item from the recent settings menu, highlight it and  
press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O  
again to delete the selected item.  
288 m Recent Settings  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Technical Notes  
Read this chapter for information on compatible accessories,  
cleaning and storing the camera, and what to do if an error  
message is displayed or you encounter problems using the  
camera.  
Compatible Lenses  
Compatible CPU Lenses  
This camera supports autofocus with AF-S and AF-I CPU lenses  
only. AF-S lenses have names beginning with AF-S, AF-I lenses  
names beginning with AF-I. Autofocus is not supported with  
other autofocus (AF) lenses. The following table lists the features  
available with compatible lenses in viewfinder photography:  
Camera setting  
Focus  
Mode  
Metering  
L
MF (with  
AF electronic MF  
rangefinder)  
Other  
modes  
M
N
M
3D Color  
Lens/accessory  
AF-S, AF-I NIKKOR  
z
z7  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z1  
z1  
z1  
z1  
z1  
Other type G or D AF NIKKOR  
PC-E NIKKOR series 2, 3  
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 5  
AF-S/AF-I teleconverter 6  
z
z4  
z4  
z7  
Other AF NIKKOR (except lenses  
for F3AF)  
AI-P NIKKOR  
z8  
z9  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z1  
z1  
1
2
Spot metering meters selected focus point (0114).  
Observe due caution when tilting or shifting PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED lenses, as they may  
contact the camera body and cause damage or injury.  
3
Shifting and/or tilting the lens interferes with exposure.  
Technical Notes 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
4
5
Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
Optimal exposure will only be achieved if the lens is at maximum aperture and the lens is not  
shifted or tilted.  
6
7
8
AF-S or AF-I lens required.  
With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
When AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 (New), or  
AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lenses are zoomed all the way in at the minimum focus distance, the  
in-focus indicator may be displayed when the image on the matte screen in the viewfinder is  
not in focus. Focus manually until image in viewfinder is in focus.  
With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
9
Noise in the form of lines may appear during autofocus when movies  
are recorded at high ISO sensitivities. Use manual focus or focus lock.  
DIX NIKKOR Lenses  
IX NIKKOR lenses can not be used.  
290 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AIdentifying CPU and Type G, E, and D Lenses  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts, type G,  
E, and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel. Type G and E lenses are  
not equipped with a lens aperture ring.  
CPU contacts  
Aperture ring  
CPU lens  
Type G or E lens  
Type D lens  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the  
aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number).  
AMatrix Metering  
For matrix metering, the camera uses a 420-pixel RGB sensor to set  
exposure according to tone distribution, color, composition, and, with  
type G, E, or D lenses, distance information (3D color matrix metering  
II; with other CPU lenses, the camera uses color matrix metering II;  
which does not include 3D distance information).  
Technical Notes 291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
Non-CPU lenses may only be used when the camera is in mode  
M. Selecting another mode disables the shutter release.  
Aperture must be adjusted manually via the lens aperture ring  
and the camera metering system, i-TTL flash control, and other  
features requiring a CPU lens can not be used. Some non-CPU  
lenses can not be used; see “Incompatible Accessories and Non-  
CPU Lenses,below.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
MF(withelectronic  
rangefinder)  
Mode  
Other  
modes  
AF  
MF  
M
Lens/accessory  
AI-, AI-modified NIKKOR or Nikon  
Series E lenses  
Medical NIKKOR 120mm f/4  
Reflex NIKKOR  
PC NIKKOR  
AI-type Teleconverter  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attachment 6  
z1  
z
z2  
z
z4  
z5  
z1  
z
z
z
z
z
z2, 3  
z2  
z2  
z2  
z2  
Auto extension rings (PK-series 11A,  
12, or 13; PN-11)  
z1  
z
z2  
1
2
3
4
5
6
With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
Exposure indicator can not be used.  
Can be used at shutter speeds slower than flash sync speed by one step or more.  
Can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
Attach in vertical orientation (can be used in horizontal orientation once attached).  
292 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DIncompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with  
the D3300:  
TC-16A AF teleconverter  
Non-AI lenses  
Lenses that require the AU-1 focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm  
f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)  
Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)  
2.1cm f/4  
Extension Ring K2  
180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers 174041–174180)  
360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial numbers 174031–174127)  
200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers 280001–300490)  
AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,  
AF Teleconverter TC-16)  
PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or earlier)  
PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–906200)  
PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)  
Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers 142361–143000)  
Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers 200111–200310)  
Technical Notes 293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DAF-Assist Illumination  
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft 8 in.–9 ft  
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 18–  
200 mm and remove the lens hood. AF-assist illumination is not  
available with the following lenses:  
AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 55–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 70–200mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED VR II  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 80–200mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Nikkor 200mm f/2G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200mm f/2G ED VR II  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
At ranges under 1 m (3 ft 3 in.), the following lenses may block the AF-  
assist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 28mm f/1.8G  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 35mm f/1.4G  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 70–200mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.4G  
AF-S NIKKOR 85mm f/1.8G  
AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED  
294 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DThe Built-in Flash  
The built-in flash can be used with lens focal lengths of 18–300 mm,  
although in some cases the flash may be unable to entirely light the  
subject at some ranges or focal lengths due to shadows cast by the  
lens (see the illustration below), while lenses that block the subject’s  
view of the red-eye reduction lamp may interfere with red-eye  
reduction. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.  
Shadow  
Shadow  
The flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m and can not be used in the  
macro range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light  
the entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those  
given below:  
Minimum distance  
without vignetting  
Lens  
Zoom position  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 10–24mm  
f/3.5–4.5G ED  
24 mm  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 12–24mm  
f/4G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 16–35mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 16–85mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
24 mm  
35 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
24–85 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 17–35mm  
f/2.8D IF-ED  
Technical Notes 295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Minimum distance  
without vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
Lens  
Zoom position  
28 mm  
35 mm  
45–55 mm  
24 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
24 mm  
28–35 mm  
18 mm  
24–70 mm  
18 mm  
24 mm  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 17–55mm  
f/2.8G IF-ED  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
2.0 m/ 6 ft 7 in.  
No vignetting  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S NIKKOR 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5G ED  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 18–35mm  
f/3.5–4.5D IF-ED  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–70mm  
f/3.5–4.5G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–105mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
35–105 mm  
18 mm  
24–135 mm  
24 mm  
AF-S DX Zoom-Nikkor 18–135mm  
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–140mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
35–140 mm  
AF-S DX VR Zoom-Nikkor 18–200mm  
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED,  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–200mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR II  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–300mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
24 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
35–200 mm  
35–300 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
24 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
2.5 m/ 8 ft 2 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
AF Zoom-Nikkor 20–35mm  
f/2.8D IF  
AF-S NIKKOR 24mm f/1.4G ED  
24 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED  
296 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Minimum distance  
without vignetting  
Lens  
Zoom position  
24 mm  
28–120 mm  
24 mm  
28–120 mm  
35 mm  
50–70 mm  
28 mm  
35 mm  
50–300 mm  
200 mm  
250 mm  
300 mm  
24 mm  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
No vignetting  
1.5 m/ 4 ft 11 in.  
1.0 m/ 3 ft 3 in.  
No vignetting  
4.0 m/ 13 ft 2 in.  
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.  
2.5 m/8 ft 2 in.  
3.0 m/9 ft 10 in.  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24–120mm  
f/3.5–5.6G IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 24–120mm f/4G ED VR  
AF-S Zoom-Nikkor 28–70mm  
f/2.8D IF-ED  
AF-S NIKKOR 28–300mm  
f/3.5–5.6G ED VR  
AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 200–400mm  
f/4G IF-ED,  
AF-S NIKKOR 200–400mm f/4G ED VR II  
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED *  
* When not shifted or tilted.  
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be  
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.  
Technical Notes 297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ACalculating Angle of View  
The size of the area exposed by a 35mm camera is 36 × 24 mm. The  
size of the area exposed by the D3300, in contrast, is 23.5 × 15.6 mm,  
meaning that the angle of view of a 35mm camera is approximately 1.5  
times that of the D3300. The approximate focal length of lenses for the  
D3300 in 35mm format can be calculated by multiplying the focal  
length of the lens by about 1.5.  
Picture size (35mm format)  
(36 × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D3300)  
(23.5 × 15.6 mm)  
Angle of view (35mm format)  
Angle of view (D3300)  
298 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)  
The camera supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
and can be used with CLS-compatible flash units. The built-in  
flash will not fire when an optional flash unit is attached.  
Flash Units Compatible with the Creative  
Lighting System (CLS)  
The camera can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash  
units:  
Flash unit  
Feature  
Guide  
No. 4  
SB-9101 SB-9001 SB-800 SB-7001 SB-600 SB-4002 SB-3002 SB-R2003  
ISO 100 34/111 34/111 38/125 28/92 30/98 21/69 18/59 10/33  
ISO 200 48/157 48/157 53/174 39/128 42/138 30/98 25/82 14/46  
1
If a color filter is attached to the SB-910, SB-900, or SB-700 when AUTO or N(flash) is selected  
for white balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance  
appropriately.  
2
3
Wireless flash control is not available.  
Controlled remotely using optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 flash unit or SU-800  
wireless Speedlight commander.  
4
m/ft, 20 °C (68 °F), SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;  
SB-910, SB-900, and SB-700 with standard illumination.  
The SU-800 wireless speedlight commander: When mounted on a  
CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be used as a  
commander for remote SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700,  
SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in up to three groups. The  
SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.  
Technical Notes 299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
AThe Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)  
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved  
communication between the camera and compatible flash units for  
improved flash photography. Refer to the documentation provided  
with the flash unit for details.  
AGuide Number  
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide  
Number by the aperture. If, for example, the flash unit has a Guide  
Number of 34 m or 111 ft (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F); its range at an aperture  
of f/5.6 is 34÷5.6 or about 6.1 meters (or in feet, 111÷5.6=approximately  
19 ft 10 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the  
Guide Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).  
300 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The following features are available with CLS-compatible flash  
units:  
CLS-compatible flash units  
SU-800  
Close-up  
photography  
Commander  
i-TTL  
balanced fill-  
z
z z z  
z  
z
z
flash for  
digital SLR 1  
Standard  
i-TTL  
i-TTL flash for z2 z2 z z2  
z  
digital SLR  
AA Auto aperture z3 z3  
A
Non-TTL auto z3 z3  
Distance-  
GN priority  
manual  
z
z z  
M
Manual  
Repeating  
flash  
z
z
z z z  
z4 z4  
RPT  
z
Remote flash  
control  
i-TTL i-TTL  
z
z
z z  
z z  
z  
z
z
z
Quickwireless  
flash control  
[A:B]  
AA Auto aperture z5 z5  
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
z
z
z
z z  
Repeating  
flash  
RPT  
z
z
Technical Notes 301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CLS-compatible flash units  
SU-800  
Close-up  
photography  
Commander  
i-TTL i-TTL  
Quickwireless  
flash control  
AA Auto aperture z5 z5  
z
z
z z z  
z z z  
z
z
[A:B]  
z
A
M
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
z
z
z
z z z  
Repeating  
flash  
Flash Color Information  
Communication  
RPT  
z
z
z z z  
z z z  
z  
z
AF-assist for multi-area AF  
Red-eye reduction  
Camera flash mode selection  
Camera flash unit firmware  
update  
z
z
z z z  
z z z  
z
z  
z  
z
z
z  
z  
1
2
3
Not available with spot metering.  
Can also be selected with flash unit.  
AA/A mode selection performed on flash unit using custom settings. A is selected when a non-  
CPU lens is used.  
4
5
Can only be selected with camera (0230).  
When a non-CPU lens is used, non-TTL auto (A) is used regardless of mode selected with flash  
unit.  
302 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Other Flash Units  
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and  
manual modes. Use with the camera in exposure mode S or M  
and a shutter speed of 1  
/200 s or slower selected.  
Flash unit  
SB-80DX,  
SB-28DX,  
SB-28, SB-26,  
SB-25, SB-24  
SB-30, SB-27 2, SB-23,  
SB-22S, SB-22, SB-29 3,  
SB-20, SB-16B, SB-21B 3,  
SB-50DX 1  
Flash mode  
A
M
SB-15  
z
SB-29S 3  
z
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
Repeating flash  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
G
z
z
REAR Rear-curtain sync 4  
1
2
Select mode P, S, A, or M, lower built-in flash, and use optional flash unit only.  
Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash unit to A (non-  
TTL auto flash).  
3
4
Autofocus is available with AF-S VR Micro-Nikkor 105mm f/2.8G IF-ED and AF-S Micro NIKKOR  
60mm f/2.8G ED lenses only.  
Available when camera is used to select flash mode.  
AThe AS-15 Sync Terminal Adapter  
When the AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately) is  
mounted on the camera accessory shoe, flash accessories can be  
connected via a sync cable.  
DUse Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon flash units. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V  
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal  
operation, but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before  
using a Nikon flash unit not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-  
authorized service representative for more information.  
Technical Notes 303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DNotes on Optional Flash Units  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the flash  
unit supports CLS, refer to the section on CLS-compatible digital SLR  
cameras. The D3300 is not included in the “digital SLR” category in the  
SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.  
If an optional flash unit is attached in shooting modes other than j, %,  
3, ), and I, the flash will fire with every shot, even in modes in which  
the built-in flash can not be used.  
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 100 and  
12800. At high ISO sensitivities, noise (lines) may appear in photos  
taken with some optional flash units; if this occurs, choose a lower  
value. At values over 12800, the desired results may not be achieved at  
some ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator flashes  
for about three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired  
at full power and the photograph may be underexposed (CLS-  
compatible flash units only; for information on the exposure and flash  
charge indicators on other units, see the manual provided with the  
flash).  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash  
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode.  
We recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard  
i-TTL flash control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.  
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash  
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may  
produce incorrect exposure.  
If the controls on the optional SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700 or  
SB-600 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander are used  
to set flash compensation, Y will appear in the information display.  
304 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
The SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-  
eye reduction, while the SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, and  
SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination with the following restrictions:  
SB-910 and SB-900: AF-assist  
illumination is available with  
17–135 mm AF lenses,  
however, autofocus is available  
only with the focus points  
shown at right.  
SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800: AF-  
assist illumination is available  
with 24–105 mm AF lenses,  
however, autofocus is available  
only with the focus points  
shown at right.  
17–105 mm  
24–34 mm  
106–135 mm  
35–105 mm  
SB-700: AF-assist illumination is  
available with 24–135 mm AF  
lenses, however, autofocus is  
available only with the focus  
points shown at right.  
24–135 mm  
Technical Notes 305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available  
for the D3300.  
Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a (014): Additional  
EN-EL14a batteries are available from local retailers and  
Nikon-authorized service representatives. EN-EL14  
batteries can also be used.  
Battery Charger MH-24 (014): Recharge EN-EL14a and  
EN-EL14 batteries.  
Power Connector EP-5A, AC Adapter EH-5b: These accessories can  
Power  
sources  
be used to power the camera for extended periods (EH-5a  
and EH-5 AC adapters can also be used). A power  
connector EP-5A is required to connect the camera to the  
EH-5b, EH-5a, or EH-5; see page 311 for details.  
Filters intended for special-effects photography may  
interfere with autofocus or the electronic rangefinder.  
The D3300 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.  
Use C-PL or C-PL II circular polarizing filters instead.  
NC filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
To prevent ghosting, use of a filter is not recommended  
Filters  
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when  
a bright light source is in the frame.  
Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters  
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1 × (Y44, Y48,  
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,  
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). See the filter manual for  
details.  
306 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
DK-5 Eyepiece Cap (073): Prevents light entering via the  
viewfinder from appearing in the photograph or  
interfering with exposure.  
DK-20C Eyepiece Correction Lenses: Lenses are available with  
diopters of –5, –4, –3, –2, 0, +0.5, +1, +2, and +3 m–1 when  
the camera diopter adjustment control is in the neutral  
position (–1 m–1). Use eyepiece correction lenses only if  
the desired focus can not be achieved with the built in  
diopter adjustment control (–1.7 to +0.5 m–1). Test  
eyepiece correction lenses before purchase to ensure that  
the desired focus can be achieved. The rubber eyecup  
can not be used with eyepiece correction lenses.  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
accessories Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in  
the center of the viewfinder for greater precision during  
focusing. Eyepiece adapter required (available  
separately).  
Eyepiece Adapter DK-22: The DK-22 is used when attaching  
the DG-2 magnifier.  
Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-6: The DR-6 attaches at a  
right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allowing the  
image in the viewfinder to be viewed at right angles to  
the lens (for example, from directly above when the  
camera is horizontal).  
Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package offering  
such features as white balance adjustment and color  
control points.  
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon  
Software  
software offers an auto update feature (Nikon Message  
Center 2) when the computer is connected to the Internet.  
See the websites listed on page xviii for the latest  
information on supported operating systems.  
Technical Notes 307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Body Cap BF-1B/Body Cap BF-1A: The body cap keeps the mirror,  
viewfinder screen, and image sensor free of dust when a  
lens is not in place.  
Body cap  
Accessory  
Accessory Shoe Cover BS-1: A cover protecting the accessory  
shoe covers shoe. The accessory shoe is used for optional flash units.  
Wireless Remote Control ML-L3 (097): The ML-L3 uses a 3 V  
CR2025 battery.  
Pressing the battery-chamber latch to the right (q),  
insert a fingernail into the gap and open the battery  
chamber (w). Ensure that the battery is inserted in the  
correct orientation (r).  
Remote  
controls/  
wireless  
remote  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-R10/WR-T10: When a WR-R10  
controller  
wireless remote controller is attached, the camera can be  
controlled wirelessly using a WR-T10 wireless remote  
controller (099, 258).  
Wireless Remote Controller WR-1 (099, 258): WR-1 units are  
used in groups of two or more, with one functioning as a  
transmitter and the remaining units acting as receivers.  
The receivers are attached to the accessory terminals of  
one or more cameras, allowing the transmitter to be used  
to release the camera shutters.  
308 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Microphones Stereo Microphone ME-1 (0161)  
The D3300 is equipped with an  
accessory terminal for WR-1 and  
WR-R10 wireless remote controllers  
Accessory  
terminal  
(099, 258), MC-DC2 remote cords  
(0110, 258), and GP-1/GP-1A GPS  
accessories units (0259), which connect with  
the 4mark on the connector  
aligned with the 2next to the accessory terminal (close  
the connector cover when the terminal is not in use).  
UC-E17 and UC-E6 USB cables (0204, 208): The supplied  
UC-E17 cable is not available for separate purchase;  
USB and A/V purchase UC-E6 cables instead.  
connector EG-CP14 audio/video cables  
accessories Wireless Mobile Adapter WU-1a (0260): Supports two-way  
communication between the camera and smart devices  
running the Wireless Mobile Utility.  
AOptional Accessories  
Availability may vary with country or region. See our website or  
brochures for the latest information.  
Technical Notes 309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Approved Memory Cards  
The following SD memory cards have been tested and approved  
for use in the D3300. Cards with class 6 or faster write speeds are  
recommended for movie recording. Recording may end  
unexpectedly when cards with slower write speeds are used.  
SD memory  
cards  
SDXC memory  
cards 3  
SDHC memory cards 2  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
SanDisk  
Toshiba  
64 GB  
4 GB, 6 GB, 8 GB, 12 GB, 16 GB, 24 GB,  
32 GB  
Panasonic  
48 GB, 64 GB  
2 GB 1  
Lexar Media  
Platinum II  
Professional  
Full-HD Video  
64 GB  
64 GB, 128 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB, 32 GB  
4 GB, 8 GB, 16 GB  
1
2
3
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used support 2 GB  
cards.  
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card will be used are SDHC-  
compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.  
Check that any card readers or other devices with which the card  
will be used are SDXC-compliant. The camera supports UHS-I.  
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above  
cards, please contact the manufacturer.  
310 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Attaching a Power Connector and AC Adapter  
Turn the camera off before attaching an optional power  
connector and AC adapter.  
1
Ready the camera.  
Open the battery-chamber (q) and  
power connector (w) covers.  
2
Insert the EP-5A power connector.  
Be sure to insert the connector in the  
orientation shown, using the  
connector to keep the orange battery  
latch pressed to one side. Be sure the  
connector is fully inserted.  
3
Close the battery-chamber cover.  
Position the power connector cable so  
that it passes through the power  
connector slot and close the battery-  
chamber cover.  
Technical Notes 311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Connect the AC adapter.  
Connect the AC adapter power cable to the AC socket on AC  
adapter (e) and the EP-5A power cable to the DC socket (r).  
A P icon is displayed in the monitor when the camera is  
powered by the AC adapter and power connector.  
312 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period,  
remove the battery and store it in a cool, dry area with the  
terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the  
camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not store your camera  
with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%  
are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic  
fields, such as televisions or radios  
are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below  
–10 °C (14 °F)  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with  
a soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or  
Camera  
body  
seaside, wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened  
in distilled water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or  
other foreign matter inside the camera may cause damage  
not covered under warranty.  
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust  
Lens, mirror, and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the  
and can vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove  
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens  
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing  
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a  
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this  
Monitor  
could result in damage or malfunction.  
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.  
Technical Notes 313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Image Sensor Cleaning  
If you suspect that dirt or dust on the image sensor is appearing  
in photographs, you can clean the sensor using the Clean image  
sensor option in the setup menu. The sensor can be cleaned at  
any time using the Clean now option, or cleaning can be  
performed automatically when the camera is turned on or off.  
❚❚ “Clean Now”  
1
2
Place the camera base down.  
Image sensor cleaning is most  
effective when the camera is placed  
base down as shown at right.  
Select Clean image sensor in the  
setup menu.  
Press the G button to display the  
menus. Highlight Clean image  
sensor in the setup menu (0231)  
and press 2.  
G button  
314 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3
Select Clean now.  
Highlight Clean now and  
press J.  
The camera will check the image  
sensor and then begin cleaning. 1  
flashes in the viewfinder and other  
operations can not be performed. Do  
not remove or disconnect the power  
source until cleaning is complete and  
the message shown at right is no  
longer displayed.  
Technical Notes 315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”  
1
Select Clean at startup/  
shutdown.  
Select Clean image sensor,  
then highlight Clean at  
startup/shutdown and  
press 2.  
2
Select an option.  
Highlight an option and  
press J. Choose from  
Clean at startup, Clean at  
shutdown, Clean at  
startup & shutdown, and  
Cleaning off.  
DImage Sensor Cleaning  
Using camera controls during startup interrupts image sensor  
cleaning.  
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not  
be fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu,  
clean the image sensor manually (0317) or consult a Nikon-  
authorized service representative.  
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession,  
image sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the  
camera’s internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a  
short wait.  
316 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Manual Cleaning  
If foreign matter can not be removed from the image sensor  
using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu  
(0314), the sensor can be cleaned manually as described  
below. Note, however, that the sensor is extremely delicate and  
easily damaged. Nikon recommends that the sensor be cleaned  
only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
1
Charge the battery.  
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or  
cleaning the image sensor. Be sure the battery is fully  
charged before proceeding.  
2
3
Remove the lens.  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.  
Turn the camera on and press the G  
button to display the menus.  
Highlight Lock mirror up for  
cleaning in the setup menu and press  
2(note that this option is not  
available at battery levels of H or  
G button  
below).  
Technical Notes 317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4
Press J.  
The message shown at right will be  
displayed in the monitor.  
5
6
Raise the mirror.  
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way down. The mirror will be  
raised and the shutter curtain will  
open, revealing the image sensor.  
Examine the image sensor.  
Holding the camera so that light falls  
on the image sensor, examine the  
interior of the camera for dust or lint.  
If no foreign objects are present,  
proceed to Step 8.  
7
Clean the sensor.  
Remove any dust and lint from the  
sensor with a blower. Do not use a  
blower-brush, as the bristles could  
damage the sensor. Dirt that can not  
be removed with a blower can only be  
removed by Nikon-authorized service  
personnel. Under no circumstances should you touch or  
wipe the sensor.  
318 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8
Turn the camera off.  
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter  
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.  
AUse a Reliable Power Source  
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera  
powers off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close  
automatically. To prevent damage to the curtain, observe the  
following precautions:  
Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source  
while the mirror is raised.  
If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound  
and the self-timer lamp will flash to warn that the shutter curtain will  
close and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End  
cleaning or inspection immediately.  
Technical Notes 319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DForeign Matter on the Image Sensor  
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from  
coming into contact with the image sensor during production and  
shipping. The D3300, however, is designed to be used with  
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera  
when lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this  
foreign matter may adhere to the image sensor, where it may appear in  
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera  
when no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with  
the camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign  
matter that may be adhering to the body cap. Avoid exchanging  
lenses in dusty environments.  
Should foreign matter find its way onto the image sensor, clean the  
sensor as described above, or have the sensor cleaned by authorized  
Nikon service personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of  
foreign matter on the sensor can be retouched using Capture NX 2  
(available separately; 0307) or the clean image options available in  
some third-party imaging applications.  
DServicing the Camera and Accessories  
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon  
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or  
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years,  
and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees  
apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are  
particularly recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any  
accessories regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional  
flash units, should be included when the camera is inspected or  
serviced.  
320 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Camera and Battery:  
Cautions  
Caring for the Camera  
Do not drop: The product may malfunction if subjected to strong shocks or  
vibration.  
Keep dry: This product is not waterproof, and may malfunction if  
immersed in water or exposed to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the  
internal mechanism can cause irreparable damage.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature: Sudden changes in temperature, such  
as those that occur when entering or leaving a heated building on a cold  
day, can cause condensation inside the device. To prevent  
condensation, place the device in a carrying case or plastic bag before  
exposing it to sudden changes in temperature.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields: Do not use or store this device in the  
vicinity of equipment that generates strong electromagnetic radiation  
or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic fields  
produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with  
the monitor, damage data stored on the memory card, or affect the  
product’s internal circuitry.  
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun: Do not leave the lens pointed at the  
sun or other strong light source for an extended period. Intense light  
may cause the image sensor to deteriorate or produce a white blur effect  
in photographs.  
Turn the product off before removing or disconnecting the power source: Do not  
unplug the product or remove the battery while the product is on or  
while images are being recorded or deleted. Forcibly cutting power in  
these circumstances could result in loss of data or in damage to product  
memory or internal circuitry. To prevent an accidental interruption of  
power, avoid carrying the product from one location to another while  
the AC adapter is connected.  
Technical Notes 321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera body, use a blower to gently remove  
dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using the  
camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off any sand or salt using a cloth  
lightly dampened in pure water and then dry the camera thoroughly.  
The lens and mirror are easily damaged. Dust and lint should be gently  
removed with a blower. When using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
vertical to prevent discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and other  
stains from the lens, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth  
and wipe the lens carefully.  
See “Image Sensor Cleaning” (0314, 317) for information on cleaning  
the image sensor.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The shutter curtain is extremely thin and  
easily damaged. Under no circumstances should you exert pressure on  
the curtain, poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to powerful air  
currents from a blower. These actions could scratch, deform, or tear the  
curtain.  
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-  
ventilated area. If you are using an AC adapter, unplug the adapter to  
prevent fire. If the product will not be used for an extended period,  
remove the battery to prevent leakage and store the camera in a plastic  
bag containing a desiccant. Do not, however, store the camera case in a  
plastic bag, as this may cause the material to deteriorate. Note that  
desiccant gradually loses its capacity to absorb moisture and should be  
replaced at regular intervals.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once  
a month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before  
putting it away.  
Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Replace the terminal cover before  
putting the battery away.  
322 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Notes on the monitor: The monitor is constructed with extremely high  
precision; at least 99.99% of pixels are effective, with no more than 0.01%  
being missing or defective. Hence while these displays may contain  
pixels that are always lit (white, red, blue, or green) or always off (black),  
this is not a malfunction and has no effect on images recorded with the  
device.  
Images in the monitor may be difficult to see in a bright light.  
Do not apply pressure to the monitor, as this could cause damage or  
malfunction. Dust or lint on the monitor can be removed with a blower.  
Stains can be removed by wiping lightly with a soft cloth or chamois  
leather. Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury  
from broken glass and to prevent liquid crystal from the monitor  
touching the skin or entering the eyes and mouth.  
Moiré: Moiré is an interference pattern created by the interaction of an  
image containing a regular, repeating grid, such as the pattern of weave  
in cloth or windows in a building, with the camera image sensor grid. If  
you notice moiré in your photographs, try changing the distance to the  
subject, zooming in and out, or changing the angle between the subject  
and the camera.  
Technical Notes 323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caring for the Battery  
Batteries may leak or explode if improperly handled. Observe the  
following precautions when handling batteries:  
Use only batteries approved for use in this equipment.  
Do not expose the battery to flame or excessive heat.  
Keep the battery terminals clean.  
Turn the product off before replacing the battery.  
Remove the battery from the camera or charger when not in use and  
replace the terminal cover. These devices draw minute amounts of  
charge even when off and could draw the battery down to the point  
that it will no longer function. If the battery will not be used for some  
time, insert it in the camera and run it flat before removing it and  
storing it in a location with an ambient temperature of 15 °C to 25 °C  
(59 °F to 77 °F; avoid hot or extremely cold locations). Repeat this  
process at least once every six months.  
Turning the camera on and off repeatedly when the battery is fully  
discharged will shorten battery life. Batteries that have been fully  
discharged must be charged before use.  
The internal temperature of the battery may rise while the battery is in  
use. Attempting to charge the battery while the internal temperature  
is elevated will impair battery performance, and the battery may not  
charge or charge only partially. Wait for the battery to cool before  
charging.  
Continuing to charge the battery after it is fully charged can impair  
battery performance.  
324 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
A marked drop in the time a fully charged battery retains its charge  
when used at room temperature indicates that it requires replacement.  
Purchase a new EN-EL14a battery.  
Charge the battery before use. When taking photographs on  
important occasions, ready a spare EN-EL14a battery and keep it fully  
charged. Depending on your location, it may be difficult to purchase  
replacement batteries on short notice. Note that on cold days, the  
capacity of batteries tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is fully  
charged before taking photographs outside in cold weather. Keep a  
spare battery in a warm place and exchange the two as necessary.  
Once warmed, a cold battery may recover some of its charge.  
Used batteries are a valuable resource; recycle in accord with local  
regulations.  
Technical Notes 325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Available Settings  
The following table lists the settings that can be adjusted in each  
mode.  
%, S, T, U, g,  
k, l, p, m, ', (, 3, 1, 2,  
i, j  
z
P, S, A, M  
z
n, o  
z
3, ), I  
Image quality  
Image size  
White balance  
Set Picture Control  
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
z
Auto distortion control  
z
z
z
(not available in I  
mode)  
z
Color space  
Active D-Lighting  
z
z
z
z
z
Noise reduction  
z
z
z
z
z
(not available in %  
mode)  
z
ISO sensitivity settings  
(not available in %  
and I modes)  
326 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
%, S, T, U, g,  
k, l, p, m, ', (, 3, 1, 2,  
i, j  
P, S , A , M  
n, o  
3, ), I  
z2  
Viewfinder  
z2  
z
z2  
(not available in %,  
(, and I modes)  
AF-area  
mode  
z2  
(not available in (  
mode)  
Live view/  
movie  
z
z
z2  
z
z
(not available in %,  
(, and I modes)  
Built-in AF-assist  
illuminator  
(not available  
in l and m  
modes)  
z
Metering  
Flash cntrl for built-in  
flash/Optional flash  
z
z
z
z
z
z
Movie settings  
Technical Notes 327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
%, S, T, U, g,  
k, l, p, m, ', (, 3, 1, 2,  
i, j  
P, S, A, M  
n, o  
3, ), I  
z2  
(not available in I  
mode)  
Release mode  
z2  
z
z2  
z
(not available in %  
and I modes)  
Viewfinder  
z
z
z
Focus  
mode  
Live view/  
movie  
AE-L/AF-L button hold  
z
z
z
z
z
z2  
z2  
z
(available only  
in P mode)  
Flexible program  
z2  
Exposure  
compensation  
z
(available only in %  
and I modes)  
z2  
z2  
z2  
(not available (available only in S,  
in l and m T, U, g, and '  
modes)  
Flash mode  
(not available  
in j mode)  
z
z
modes)  
Flash compensation  
1
2
Reset with Reset shooting menu (0224).  
Reset when mode dial is rotated to new setting.  
328 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of  
common problems below before consulting your retailer or  
Nikon representative.  
Battery/Display  
The camera is on but does not respond: Wait for recording to end. If the  
problem persists, turn the camera off. If the camera does not turn off,  
remove and reinsert the battery or, if you are using an AC adapter,  
disconnect and reconnect the AC adapter. Note that although any data  
currently being recorded will be lost, data that have already been  
recorded will not be affected by removing or disconnecting the power  
source.  
Viewfinder is out of focus: Adjust viewfinder focus (020). If this does not  
correct the problem, select single-servo autofocus (AF-S; 074), single-  
point AF (c; 078), and the center focus point, and then frame a high-  
contrast subject in the center focus point and press the shutter-release  
button halfway to focus the camera. With the camera in focus, use the  
diopter adjustment control to bring the subject into clear focus in the  
viewfinder. If necessary, viewfinder focus can be further adjusted using  
optional corrective lenses (0307).  
Displays turn off without warning: Choose longer delays for Auto off timers  
(0245).  
Information display does not appear in monitor: Shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway. If information display does not appear when you  
remove your finger from shutter-release button, confirm that On is  
selected for Auto info display (0238) and that battery is charged.  
Viewfinder display is unresponsive and dim: The response times and brightness  
of this display vary with temperature.  
Technical Notes 329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Shooting (All Modes)  
Camera takes time to turn on: Delete files or folders.  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Memory card is locked, full, or not inserted (015, 23, 338).  
Release locked is selected for Slot empty release lock (0253) and no  
memory card is inserted (015).  
Built-in flash is charging (031).  
Camera is not in focus (027).  
CPU lens with aperture ring attached but aperture not locked at  
highest f-number (0291).  
Non-CPU lens is attached but camera is not in mode M (0292).  
Only one shot taken each time shutter-release button is pressed in continuous shooting  
mode: Continuous shooting is not available if built-in flash fires (069,  
89).  
Final photo is larger than area shown in viewfinder: Viewfinder horizontal and  
vertical frame coverage is approximately 95%.  
Photos are out of focus:  
AF-S or AF-I lens is not attached: use AF-S or AF-I lens or focus manually.  
Camera unable to focus using autofocus: use manual focus or focus  
lock (076, 81, 83).  
Camera is in manual focus mode: focus manually (083).  
Focus does not lock when shutter-release button is pressed halfway: Use A (L)  
button to lock focus when live view is off and AF-C is selected for focus  
mode or when photographing moving subjects in AF-A mode (081).  
Can not select focus point:  
e (Auto-area AF; 078) is selected: choose another AF-area mode.  
Press shutter-release button halfway to start standby timer (031).  
Can not select AF-area mode: Manual focus selected (074, 83).  
330 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
AF-assist illuminator does not light:  
AF-assist illuminator does not light if AF-C is selected for autofocus  
mode (074) or if continuous-servo autofocus is selected when the  
camera is in AF-A mode. Choose AF-S. AF-assist is also not available  
when f (3D-tracking (11 points)) is selected for AF-area mode; if  
single-point or dynamic-area AF is selected, select center focus point  
(078, 80).  
The camera is currently in live view or a movie is being recorded.  
Off is selected for Built-in AF-assist illuminator (0229).  
The AF-assist illuminator can not be used in some shooting modes  
(0326).  
Illuminator has turned off automatically. Illuminator may become hot  
with continued use; wait for it to cool down.  
Image size can not be changed: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image  
quality (086).  
Camera is slow to record photos:  
Depending on shooting conditions and memory card performance,  
access lamp may light for up to about a minute after shooting ends in  
continuous release mode.  
Turn noise reduction off (0226).  
Noise (bright spots, randomly-spaced bright pixels, fog, or lines) appear in photos:  
Choose lower ISO sensitivity or turn noise reduction on (0226).  
Shutter speed is slower than 1 s: use noise reduction (0226).  
Turn Active D-Lighting off to avoid heightening the effects of noise  
(0123).  
No photo taken when remote control shutter-release button is pressed:  
Replace battery in remote control (0308).  
Choose remote control release mode (097).  
Flash is charging (031).  
Time selected for Remote on duration (ML-L3) (0247) has elapsed.  
Bright light is interfering with ML-L3 remote control.  
Technical Notes 331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Beep does not sound:  
Off is selected for Beep (0247).  
Camera is in quiet shutter-release mode (070), or movie is being  
recorded (0155).  
MF or AF-C is selected as the focus mode or subject moves when AF-A is  
selected (074).  
Smudges appear in photographs: Clean front and rear lens elements. If  
problem persists, perform image sensor cleaning (0314).  
Date is not imprinted on photos: An NEF (RAW) option is selected for image  
quality (086, 254).  
Sound is not recorded with movies: Microphone off is selected for Movie  
settings > Microphone (0158).  
Flicker or banding appears during live view or movie recording: Choose an option  
for Flicker reduction that matches the frequency of the local AC power  
supply (0241).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available in all modes.  
332 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Shooting (P, S, A, M)  
Shutter-release disabled:  
Non-CPU lens is attached: rotate camera mode dial to M (0292).  
Mode dial rotated to S after shutter speed of “Bulb” or “Time” selected  
in mode M: choose new shutter speed (0104).  
Full range of shutter speeds not available:  
Flash in use (093).  
When On is selected for Movie settings > Manual movie settings in  
the shooting menu, the range of available shutter speed varies with the  
frame rate (0159).  
Can not select desired aperture: Range of available apertures varies with lens  
used.  
Colors are unnatural:  
Adjust white balance to match light source (0124).  
Adjust Set Picture Control settings (0135).  
Can not measure white balance: Subject is too dark or too bright (0131).  
Image can not be selected as source for preset white balance: Image was not  
created with D3300 (  
0
133).  
Effects of Picture Control differ from image to image: A (auto) is selected for  
sharpening, contrast, or saturation. For consistent results over a series of  
photos, choose another setting (0140).  
Metering can not be changed: Autoexposure lock is in effect (0116).  
Exposure compensation can not be used: Choose mode P, S, or A (0100, 119).  
Noise (reddish areas or other artifacts) appears in long time-exposures: Turn noise  
reduction on (0226).  
Technical Notes 333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Playback  
NEF (RAW) image is not played back: Photo was taken at image quality of NEF  
(RAW)+JPEG (086).  
Some pictures are not displayed during playback: Select All for Playback folder.  
Note that Current is automatically selected after photograph is taken  
(0220).  
“Tall” (portrait) orientation photos are displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation:  
Select On for Rotate tall (0221).  
Photo was taken with Off selected for Auto image rotation (0243).  
Photo is displayed in image review (0221).  
Camera was pointed up or down when photo was taken (0243).  
Can not delete picture:  
Picture is protected: remove protection (0184).  
Memory card is locked (023).  
Can not retouch picture: Photo can not be further edited with this camera  
(0264).  
Can not change print order:  
Memory card is full: delete pictures (0192, 338).  
Memory card is locked (023).  
Can not select photo for printing: Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Create JPEG  
copy using NEF (RAW) processing or transfer to computer and print  
using supplied software or Capture NX 2 (0204, 275, 307).  
334 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Picture is not displayed on TV:  
Choose correct video mode (0260) or output resolution (0218).  
A/V (0215) or HDMI (0217) cable is not correctly connected.  
Camera does not respond to remote control for HDMI-CEC television:  
Select On for HDMI > Device control in the setup menu (0218).  
Adjust HDMI-CEC settings for the television as described in  
documentation provided with the device.  
Can not transfer photos to computer: OS not compatible with camera or  
transfer software. Use card reader to copy photos to computer (0203).  
Photos are not displayed in Capture NX 2: Update to latest version (0307).  
Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 does not have desired effect: Image sensor  
cleaning changes the position of dust on the image sensor. Image Dust  
Off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed  
can not be used with photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is  
performed. Image Dust Off reference data recorded after image sensor  
cleaning is performed can not be used with photographs taken before  
image sensor cleaning is performed (0239).  
Miscellaneous  
Date of recording is not correct: Set camera clock (018, 242).  
Menu item can not be selected: Some options are not available at certain  
combinations of settings or when no memory card is inserted (015,  
263, 326).  
Technical Notes 335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Error Messages  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear  
in the viewfinder and monitor.  
AWarning Icons  
A flashing d in the monitor or s in the viewfinder indicates that a  
warning or error message can be displayed in the monitor by pressing  
the W (Q) button.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Lock lens aperture ring  
at minimum aperture  
(largest f/-number).  
Set lens aperture ring to  
minimum aperture (highest  
f-number).  
B
291  
(flashes)  
If non-CPU lens is attached,  
select mode M.  
290  
108  
F/s  
(flashes)  
Lens not attached  
A lens with a retractable lens  
barrel button is attached with the  
lens barrel retracted. Press the  
Before taking photos,  
rotate the zoom ring to  
extend the lens.  
F
17  
(flashes) retractable lens barrel button  
and rotate the zoom ring to  
extend the lens.  
Shutter release  
disabled. Recharge  
battery.  
d/s Turn camera off and recharge or  
(flashes) replace battery.  
14, 17  
306  
This battery cannot be  
used. Choose battery  
designated for use in  
this camera.  
d
(flashes)  
Use Nikon-approved battery.  
336 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Indicator  
Monitor  
Initialization error.  
Turn camera off and  
then on again.  
Viewfinder  
d/ Turn camera off, remove and  
replace battery, and then turn  
(flashes) camera on again.  
Solution  
0
k
15, 17  
Battery level is low.  
Complete operation  
and turn camera off  
immediately.  
End cleaning and turn camera off  
and recharge or replace battery.  
319  
Clock not set  
No memory card  
inserted  
Set camera clock.  
18, 242  
15  
S/s Turn camera off and confirm that  
(flashes) card is correctly inserted.  
Memory card is locked.  
Slide lock to “write”  
Memory card is locked (write  
protected). Slide card write-  
protect switch to “write” position.  
(
23  
Use approved card.  
310  
234  
Format card. If problem  
persists, card may be damaged.  
Contact Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
Error creating new folder.  
Delete files or insert new  
memory card.  
Insert new memory card.  
Eye-Fi card is still emitting  
wireless signal after Disable has  
been selected for Eye-Fi  
upload. To terminate wireless  
transmission, turn the camera  
off and remove the card.  
15, 192  
This memory card  
cannot be used. Card (/k  
may be damaged.  
Insert another card.  
(flashes)  
15  
261  
Technical Notes 337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Eye-Fi card is locked (write  
protected). Slide card write-  
protect switch to “write” position.  
Not available if Eye-Fi (/k  
23  
card is locked.  
(flashes)  
This card is not  
formatted.  
Format the card.  
T
Format card or turn camera off  
15, 234  
(flashes) and insert new memory card.  
Reduce quality or size.  
j/A/s  
85  
192  
15  
Card is full  
Delete photographs.  
(flashes)  
Insert new memory card.  
Camera can not focus using  
autofocus. Change composition  
or focus manually.  
(flashes)  
27, 76,  
83  
Use commercial ND filter.  
In mode:  
306  
S
A
Increase shutter speed  
Choose a smaller aperture 107  
105  
Subject is too bright  
(higher f-number)  
s
% Choose another shooting  
mode  
4
(flashes)  
Use a higher ISO sensitivity.  
Use flash.  
95  
89  
In mode:  
Subject is too dark  
S
Lower shutter speed  
Choose a larger aperture  
(lower f-number)  
105  
107  
A
338 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
A
(flashes)  
&
Solution  
0
No “Bulb” in S mode  
No “Time” in S mode  
Change shutter speed or select  
105,  
108  
mode M.  
(flashes)  
Press the live-view  
button when you are  
ready to start a  
panorama.  
q
Press the a button to start live  
(flashes)/ view before recording a  
B
63  
63  
panorama.  
Use a lens with a focal length of  
55 mm or less to shoot  
panoramas. If you are using a  
zoom lens, choose a focal length  
of 55 mm or less.  
Cannot shoot  
panorama with lens of  
Flash has fired at full power.  
Check photo in monitor; if  
(flashes) underexposed, adjust settings  
and try again.  
N
Use the flash.  
89  
94, 95,  
107  
Change distance to subject,  
aperture, flash range, or ISO  
sensitivity.  
Lens focal length is less than  
18 mm: use a longer focal  
length.  
Optional SB-400 or SB-300 flash  
unit attached: flash is in bounce  
position or focus distance is  
very short. Continue shooting;  
if necessary, increase focus  
distance to prevent shadows  
from appearing in photograph.  
N/s  
(flashes)  
Technical Notes 339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Error occurred updating firmware  
for optional flash unit. Contact  
(flashes) Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
s
Flash error  
Release shutter. If error persists  
or appears frequently, consult  
Nikon-authorized service  
Error. Press shutter  
release button again.  
O
Start-up error. Contact (flashes)  
a Nikon-authorized  
representative.  
Consult Nikon-authorized service  
representative.  
service representative.  
Metering error  
Unable to start live  
view.  
Please wait for camera  
to cool.  
Wait for the internal circuits to  
cool before resuming live view or  
movie recording.  
152,  
157  
Folder selected for playback  
contains no images (note that  
this message will be displayed if  
memory card is inserted after  
Current is selected for Playback  
folder in playback menu and  
playback started before any  
pictures are taken). Insert  
Folder contains no  
images.  
15, 220  
another memory card or select  
All for Playback folder.  
340 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Indicator  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
Solution  
0
Cannot display this  
file.  
File can not be played back on  
camera.  
Images created with other  
devices can not be retouched.  
Memory card does not contain  
NEF (RAW) images for use with  
NEF (RAW) processing.  
Check printer. To resume, select  
Continue (if available).  
Paper is not selected size. Insert  
paper of correct size and select  
Continue.  
Cannot select this file.  
264  
275  
No image for  
retouching.  
*
Check printer.  
Check paper.  
*
*
*
Paper jam.  
Clear jam and select Continue.  
Insert paper of selected size and  
select Continue.  
Out of paper.  
Check ink. To resume, select  
Continue.  
Replace ink and select Continue.  
*
*
Check ink supply.  
Out of ink.  
* See printer manual for more information.  
Technical Notes 341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifications  
❚❚ Nikon D3300 Digital Camera  
Type  
Type  
Lens mount  
Single-lens reflex digital camera  
Nikon F mount (with AF contacts)  
Effective angle of view Nikon DX format; focal length equivalent to  
approx. 1.5× that of lenses with FX format angle of  
view  
Effective pixels  
Effective pixels  
24.2 million  
Image sensor  
Image sensor  
Total pixels  
23.5 × 15.6 mm CMOS sensor  
24.78 million  
Dust-reduction System Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference  
data (optional Capture NX 2 software required)  
Storage  
Image size (pixels)  
I (easy panorama) mode:  
- Normal, horizontal pan: 4800 × 1080  
- Normal, vertical pan: 1632 × 4800  
- Wide, horizontal pan: 9600 × 1080  
- Wide, vertical pan: 1632 × 9600  
Other modes:  
- 6000 × 4000 (Large)  
- 4496 × 3000 (Medium)  
- 2992 × 2000 (Small)  
File format  
NEF (RAW): 12 bit, compressed  
JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx.  
1 : 4), normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx.  
1 : 16) compression  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in  
both NEF (RAW) and JPEG formats  
342 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Storage  
Picture Control System Standard, Neutral, Vivid, Monochrome, Portrait,  
Landscape; selected Picture Control can be  
modified  
Media  
SD (Secure Digital) and UHS-I compliant SDHC  
and SDXC memory cards  
File system  
DCF 2.0, DPOF, Exif 2.3, PictBridge  
Viewfinder  
Viewfinder  
Eye-level pentamirror single-lens reflex  
viewfinder  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical  
Approx. 0.85 × (50 mm f/1.4 lens at infinity,  
–1.0 m–1  
)
Eyepoint  
18 mm (–1.0 m–1; from center surface of  
viewfinder eyepiece lens)  
Diopter adjustment  
Focusing screen  
Reflex mirror  
–1.7–+0.5 m–1  
Type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VII screen  
Quick return  
Lens aperture  
Instant return, electronically controlled  
Lens  
Compatible lenses  
Autofocus is available with AF-S and AF-I lenses.  
Autofocus is not available with other type G and D  
lenses, AF lenses (IX NIKKOR and lenses for the  
F3AF are not supported), and AI-P lenses. Non-  
CPU lenses can be used in mode M, but the  
camera exposure meter will not function.  
The electronic rangefinder can be used with  
lenses that have a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or  
faster.  
Technical Notes 343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Shutter  
Type  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-  
plane shutter  
1
Speed  
Flash sync speed  
/
4000 – 30 s in steps of 1  
/
/
3 EV; Bulb; Time  
200 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1  
slower  
X=1  
/
200 s or  
Release  
Release mode  
8 (single frame), I (continuous), J (quiet  
shutter release), E (self-timer), " (delayed  
remote; ML-L3), # (quick-response remote; ML-L3)  
Up to 5 fps  
Frame advance rate  
Note: Frame rates assume manual focus, manual or  
shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of  
1
/
250 s or faster, and other settings at default  
values.  
Self-timer  
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 20 s; 1–9 exposures  
Exposure  
Metering mode  
TTL exposure metering using 420-pixel RGB  
sensor  
Metering method  
Matrix metering: 3D color matrix metering II (type  
G, E, and D lenses); color matrix metering II  
(other CPU lenses)  
Center-weighted metering: Weight of 75% given to  
8-mm circle in center of frame  
Spot metering: Meters 3.5-mm circle (about 2.5%  
of frame) centered on selected focus point  
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV  
lens, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Exposure meter  
coupling  
Spot metering: 2–20 EV  
CPU  
344 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Exposure  
Mode  
Auto modes (i auto; j auto, flash off);  
programmed auto with flexible program (P);  
shutter-priority auto (S); aperture-priority auto (A);  
manual (M); scene modes (k portrait;  
l landscape; p child; m sports; n close up;  
o night portrait); special effects modes (% night  
vision; S super vivid; T pop; U photo illustration;  
g color sketch; ' toy camera effect; ( miniature  
effect; 3 selective color; 1 silhouette; 2 high key;  
3 low key; ) HDR painting; I easy panorama)  
Exposure compensation Can be adjusted by –5 – +5 EV in increments of  
1
/
3 EV in P, S, A, and M modes  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with A (L)  
button  
ISO sensitivity  
ISO 100 – 12800 in steps of 1 EV. Can also be set to  
approx. 1 EV (ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO  
12800; auto ISO sensitivity control available  
On, off  
(Recommended  
Exposure Index)  
Active D-Lighting  
Focus  
Autofocus  
Nikon Multi-CAM 1000 autofocus sensor module  
with TTL phase detection, 11 focus points  
(including one cross-type sensor), and AF-assist  
illuminator (range approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft 8 in.–9 ft  
10 in.)  
Detection range  
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Technical Notes 345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Focus  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); continuous-  
servo AF (AF-C); auto AF-S/AF-C selection (AF-A);  
predictive focus tracking activated  
automatically according to subject status  
Manual focus (MF): Electronic rangefinder can be  
used  
Focus point  
AF-area mode  
Can be selected from 11 focus points  
Single-point AF, dynamic-area AF, auto-area AF,  
3D-tracking (11 points)  
Focus lock  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release  
button halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing  
A (L) button  
Flash  
Built-in flash  
i, k, p, n, o, S, T, U, g, ' : Auto flash with  
auto pop-up  
P, S, A, M: Manual pop-up with button release  
Approx. 12/39, 12/39 with manual flash (m/ft, ISO  
100, 20 °C/68 °F)  
Guide Number  
Flash control  
TTL: i-TTL flash control using 420-pixel RGB sensor  
is available with built-in flash and SB-910, SB-900,  
SB-800, SB-700, SB-600, SB-400, or SB-300; i-TTL  
balanced fill-flash for digital SLR is used with  
matrix and center-weighted metering, standard  
i-TTL flash for digital SLR with spot metering  
Auto, auto with red-eye reduction, auto slow sync,  
auto slow sync with red-eye reduction, fill-flash,  
red-eye reduction, slow sync, slow sync with red-  
eye reduction, rear-curtain with slow sync, rear-  
curtain sync, off  
Flash mode  
346 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Flash  
Flash compensation  
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1  
3 EV  
/
Flash-ready indicator Lights when built-in flash or optional flash unit is  
fully charged; flashes after flash is fired at full  
output  
Accessory shoe  
ISO 518 hot-shoe with sync and data contacts and  
safety lock  
Nikon Creative Lighting Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with  
System (CLS)  
SB-910, SB-900, SB-800, or SB-700 as a master  
flash or SU-800 as commander; Flash Color  
Information Communication supported with all  
CLS-compatible flash units  
Sync terminal  
AS-15 sync terminal adapter (available separately)  
White balance  
White balance  
Auto, incandescent, fluorescent (7 types), direct  
sunlight, flash, cloudy, shade, preset manual, all  
except preset manual with fine-tuning  
Live view  
Lens servo  
Autofocus (AF): Single-servo AF (AF-S); full-time-  
servo AF (AF-F)  
Manual focus (MF)  
AF-area mode  
Autofocus  
Face-priority AF, wide-area AF, normal-area AF,  
subject-tracking AF  
Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame (camera  
selects focus point automatically when face-  
priority AF or subject-tracking AF is selected)  
Available in i and j modes  
Automatic scene  
selection  
Technical Notes 347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Movie  
Metering  
Metering method  
TTL exposure metering using main image sensor  
Matrix  
Frame size (pixels) and 1920 × 1080, 60p (progressive)/50p/30p/25p/  
frame rate  
24p, high/normal  
1280 × 720, 60p/50p, high/normal  
640 × 424, 30p/25p, high/normal  
Frame rates of 30p (actual frame rate 29.97 fps)  
and 60p (actual frame rate 59.94 fps) are available  
when NTSC is selected for video mode. 25p and  
50p are available when PAL is selected for video  
mode. Actual frame rate when 24p is selected is  
23.976 fps.  
File format  
MOV  
Video compression  
H.264/MPEG-4 Advanced Video Coding  
Audio recording format Linear PCM  
Audio recording device Built-in monaural or external stereo microphone;  
sensitivity adjustable  
ISO sensitivity  
ISO 100–12800; can also be set to approx. 1 EV  
(ISO 25600 equivalent) above ISO 12800  
Monitor  
Monitor  
7.5-cm (3-in.), approx. 921k-dot (VGA) TFT LCD  
with 170 ° viewing angle, approx. 100% frame  
coverage, and brightness adjustment  
Playback  
Playback  
Full-frame and thumbnail (4, 9, or 72 images or  
calendar) playback with playback zoom, movie  
and panorama playback, photo and/or movie  
slide shows, histogram display, highlights, auto  
image rotation, picture rating, and image  
comment (up to 36 characters)  
348 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Interface  
USB  
Hi-Speed USB  
Video output  
HDMI output  
Accessory terminal  
NTSC, PAL  
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector  
Wireless remote controllers: WR-1, WR-R10 (available  
separately)  
Remote cords: MC-DC2 (available separately)  
GPS units: GP-1/GP-1A (available separately)  
Stereo mini-pin jack (3.5mm diameter); supports  
optional ME-1 stereo microphones  
Audio input  
Supported languages  
Supported languages Arabic, Bengali, Bulgarian, Chinese (Simplified  
and Traditional), Czech, Danish, Dutch, English,  
Finnish, French, German, Greek, Hindi, Hungarian,  
Indonesian, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Marathi,  
Norwegian, Persian, Polish, Portuguese (Portugal  
and Brazil), Romanian, Russian, Serbian, Spanish,  
Swedish, Tamil, Telugu, Thai, Turkish, Ukrainian,  
Vietnamese  
Power source  
Battery  
AC adapter  
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL14a battery  
EH-5b AC adapter; requires EP-5A power  
connector (available separately)  
Tripod socket  
Tripod socket  
1
/
4 in. (ISO 1222)  
Technical Notes 349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Dimensions/weight  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 124 × 98 × 75.5 mm (4.9 × 3.9 × 3 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 460 g (1 lb 0.2 oz) with battery and  
memory card but without body cap; approx.  
410 g/14.5 oz (camera body only)  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Humidity  
85% or less (no condensation)  
Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery operating at  
the temperature specified by the Camera and Imaging Products Association (CIPA): 23 3 °C  
(73.4 5.4 °F).  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in  
this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that  
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
350 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ MH-24 Battery Charger  
Rated input  
AC 100–240 V, 50/60 Hz, 0.2 A maximum  
Rated output  
DC 8.4 V/0.9 A  
Supported batteries  
Charging time  
Nikon Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL14a  
Approx. 1 hour and 50 minutes at an ambient  
temperature of 25 °C/77 °F when no charge  
remains  
Operating temperature 0 °C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 70 × 26 × 97 mm (2.8 × 1.0 × 3.8 in.),  
excluding plug adapter  
Weight  
Approx. 96 g (3.4 oz), excluding plug adapter  
❚❚ EN-EL14a Rechargeable Li-ion Battery  
Type  
Rated capacity  
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery  
7.2 V/1230 mAh  
Operating temperature 0°C–40 °C (+32 °F–104 °F)  
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 38 × 53 × 14 mm (1.5 × 2.1 × 0.6 in.)  
Weight  
Approx. 49 g (1.7 oz), excluding terminal cover  
Technical Notes 351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
❚❚ AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II Lens  
Type  
Type G AF-S DX lens with built-in CPU and F  
mount  
Focal length  
18–55 mm  
Maximum aperture  
Lens construction  
f/3.5–5.6  
11 elements in 8 groups (including 1 aspherical  
lens element)  
Angle of view  
Focal length scale  
Distance information  
Zoom  
76 °–28 ° 50 ´  
Graduated in millimeters (18, 24, 35, 45, 55)  
Output to camera  
Manual zoom using independent zoom ring  
Autofocus controlled by Silent Wave Motor and  
separate focus ring for manual focus  
Lens shift using voice coil motors (VCMs)  
Focusing  
Vibration reduction  
Minimum focus distance AF: 0.28 m (0.92 ft) from focal plane at all zoom  
positions  
MF: 0.25 m (0.82 ft) from focal plane at all zoom  
positions  
Diaphragm blades  
Diaphragm  
7 (rounded diaphragm opening)  
Fully automatic  
Aperture range  
18 mm focal length: f/3.5–22  
55 mm focal length: f/5.6–36  
The minimum aperture displayed may vary  
depending on the size of the exposure increment  
selected with the camera.  
Metering  
Full aperture  
Filter-attachment size 52 mm (P=0.75 mm)  
Dimensions  
Approx. 66 mm diameter × 59.5 mm (distance  
from camera lens-mount flange when lens is  
retracted)  
Weight  
Approx. 195 g (6.9 oz)  
Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software described in  
this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held liable for damages that  
may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
352 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II  
The lens generally used in this manual for illustrative purposes is  
the AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II.  
Focal length mark  
Lens mounting mark (016)  
Focal length scale  
Retractable lens barrel  
CPU contacts (0291)  
button (017)  
Rear lens cap  
A-M mode switch (023, 83)  
Lens cap  
Focus ring (083, 154)  
Vibration reduction ON/OFF  
switch (0355)  
Zoom ring (026)  
The AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II is for use  
exclusively with Nikon DX format digital cameras and features a  
retractable lens barrel.  
Technical Notes 353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
AUsing the Built-in Flash  
When using the built-in flash, be sure the subject is at a range of at  
least 0.6 m (2 ft) and remove lens hoods to prevent vignetting  
(shadows created where the end of the lens obscures the built-in  
flash).  
Shadow  
Camera  
Shadow  
Minimum distance without vignetting  
D7100/D7000/D5300/D5200/D5100/D5000/  
D3300/D3200/D3100/D3000/D300 series/  
D200/D100/D90/D80/D70 series/D60/D50/  
D40 series  
No vignetting at any focus distance  
Because the built-in flash units for the D100 and D70 can only cover  
the angle of view of a lens with a focal of 20 mm or more; vignetting  
will occur at a focal length of 18 mm.  
354 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Vibration Reduction (VR)  
AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lenses support  
vibration reduction (VR), which reduces blur caused by camera  
shake, allowing shutter speeds up to 4.0 stops slower than  
would otherwise be the case (measured at a focal length of  
55 mm with a DX-format camera according to Camera and  
Imaging Products Association [CIPA] standards; effects vary with  
the photographer and shooting conditions). This increases the  
range of shutter speeds available and permits hand-held, tripod-  
free photography in a wide range of situations.  
To use vibration reduction, slide the  
vibration reduction switch to ON.  
Vibration reduction is activated when the  
shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway, reducing the effects of camera  
shake on the image in the viewfinder and  
simplifying the process of framing the  
subject and focusing in both autofocus  
and manual focus modes. When the  
camera is panned, vibration reduction  
applies only to motion that is not part of  
the pan (if the camera is panned  
horizontally, for example, vibration reduction will be applied  
only to vertical shake), making it much easier to pan the camera  
smoothly in a wide arc.  
Turn vibration reduction off when the camera is securely  
mounted on a tripod, but leave it on if the tripod head is not  
secured or when using a monopod.  
Technical Notes 355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DVibration Reduction  
Do not turn the camera off or remove the lens while vibration  
reduction is in effect.  
Vibration reduction is disabled while the built-in flash is charging.  
When vibration reduction is active, the image in the viewfinder may  
jiggle after the shutter is released. This does not indicate a  
malfunction; wait for the image in the viewfinder to stabilize before  
shooting.  
ASupplied Accessories  
52 mm Snap-on Front Lens Cap LC-52  
Rear Lens Cap  
356 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AOptional Accessories  
52 mm screw-on filters  
LF-1 and LF-4 rear lens caps  
Flexible Lens Pouch CL-0815  
Bayonet Hood HB-69  
Align the lens hood mounting mark () with the lens hood alignment  
mark ( ) as shown in Figure q and then rotate the hood (w) until  
the mark is aligned with the lens hood lock mark (—{).  
When attaching or removing the hood, hold it near the symbol on its  
base and avoid gripping it too tightly. Vignetting may occur if the  
hood is not correctly attached.  
The hood can be reversed and mounted on the lens when not in use.  
Technical Notes 357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DLens Care  
Keep the CPU contacts clean.  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint from the lens surfaces. To  
remove smudges and fingerprints, apply a small amount of ethanol  
or lens cleaner to a soft, clean cotton cloth or lens-cleaning tissue and  
clean from the center outwards using a circular motion, taking care  
not to leave smears or touch the glass with your fingers.  
Never use organic solvents such as paint thinner or benzene to clean  
the lens.  
The lens hood or NC filters can be used to protect the front lens  
element.  
Attach the front and rear caps before placing the lens in its flexible  
pouch.  
When a lens hood is attached, do not pick up or hold the lens or  
camera using only the hood.  
If the lens will not be used for an extended period, store it in a cool,  
dry location to prevent mold and rust. Do not store in direct sunlight  
or with naphtha or camphor moth balls.  
Keep the lens dry. Rusting of the internal mechanism can cause  
irreparable damage.  
Leaving the lens in extremely hot locations could damage or warp  
parts made from reinforced plastic.  
358 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
AA Note on Wide- and Super Wide-Angle Lenses  
Autofocus may not provide the desired results in situations like those  
shown below.  
1 Objects in the background occupy more of the focus point than the  
main subject:  
If the focus point contains both  
foreground and background objects,  
the camera may focus on the  
background and the subject may be  
out of focus.  
Example: A far-off portrait  
subject at some distance from  
the background  
2 The subject contains many fine details.  
The camera may have difficulty  
focusing on subjects that lack  
contrast or appear smaller than  
objects in the background.  
Example: A field of flowers  
In these cases, use manual focus, or use focus lock to focus on  
another subject at the same distance and then recompose the  
photograph. For more information, see “Getting Good Results  
with Autofocus” (076).  
Technical Notes 359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
❚❚ Supported Standards  
DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File Systems (DCF)  
is a standard widely used in the digital camera industry to  
ensure compatibility among different makes of camera.  
DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide  
standard that allows pictures to be printed from print orders  
stored on the memory card.  
Exif version 2.3: The D3300 supports Exif (Exchangeable Image  
File Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.3, a standard in  
which information stored with photographs is used for  
optimal color reproduction when the images are output on  
Exif-compliant printers.  
PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with  
the digital camera and printer industries, allowing  
photographs to be output directly to a printer without first  
transferring them to a computer.  
HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for  
multimedia interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV  
devices capable of transmitting audiovisual data and control  
signals to HDMI-compliant devices via a single cable  
connection.  
360 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
A Trademark Information  
Mac OS and OS X are registered trademarks of Apple Inc. in the United  
States and/or other countries. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Vista  
are either registered trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. PictBridge  
logo is a trademark. The SD, SDHC, and SDXC logos are trademarks of  
the SD-3C, LLC. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia  
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing  
LLC.  
All other trade names mentioned in this manual or the other  
documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
A FreeType License (FreeType2)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The FreeType Project  
(http://www.freetype.org). All rights reserved.  
A MIT License (HarfBuzz)  
Portions of this software are copyright © 2014 The HarfBuzz Project  
(http://www.freedesktop.org/wiki/Software/HarfBuzz). All rights  
reserved.  
Technical Notes 361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Memory Card Capacity  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures  
that can be stored on a 16 GB SanDisk Extreme Pro SDHC UHS-I  
card at different image quality and size settings (figures for  
panoramas are not included).  
No. of  
images 1  
345  
524  
1000  
1700  
3300  
2000  
3300  
6300  
3900  
6500  
12,100  
Buffer  
capacity 2  
6
11  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
100  
Image quality  
Image size  
File size 1  
NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine 3  
NEF (RAW)  
Large  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
Large  
Medium  
Small  
31.5 MB  
19.5 MB  
12.1 MB  
7.4 MB  
3.8 MB  
6.3 MB  
3.8 MB  
2.0 MB  
2.9 MB  
1.9 MB  
1.0 MB  
JPEG fine  
JPEG normal  
JPEG basic  
1
2
3
All figures are approximate. Results will vary with card type, camera settings, and scene  
recorded.  
Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer at ISO 100. Drops when  
noise reduction (0226), auto distortion control (0225), or Print date (0254) is on.  
Image size applies to JPEG images only. Size of NEF (RAW) images can not be changed. File size  
is the total for NEF (RAW) and JPEG images.  
362 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Battery Life  
The movie footage or number of shots that can be recorded with  
fully-charged batteries varies with the condition of the battery,  
temperature, the interval between shots, and the length of time  
menus are displayed. Sample figures for EN-EL14a (1230 mAh)  
batteries are given below.  
1
Photographs, single-frame release mode (CIPA standard ):  
Approximately 700 shots  
Photographs, continuous release mode (Nikon standard ):  
2
Approximately 2500 shots  
3
1
Movies: Approximately 55 minutes at 1080/60p and 1080/50p  
Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F ( 3 °C/5.4 °F) with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II  
lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity to minimum range and one  
photograph taken at default settings once every 30 s; after photograph is taken, monitor is  
turned on for 4 s; tester waits for standby timer to expire after monitor is turned off; flash fired  
at full power once every other shot. Live view not used.  
2
3
Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S DX NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under the  
following test conditions: vibration reduction off, continuous release mode, focus mode set to  
AF-C, image quality set to JPEG basic, image size set to M (medium), white balance set to v,  
ISO sensitivity set to ISO 100, shutter speed 1  
250 s, focus cycled from infinity to minimum range  
/
three times after shutter-release button has been pressed halfway for 3 s; six shots are then  
taken in succession and monitor turned on for 4 s and then turned off; cycle repeated once  
standby timer has expired.  
Measured at 23°C/73.4°F ( 3°C/5.4°F) with the camera at default settings and an AF-S DX  
NIKKOR 18–55mm f/3.5–5.6G VR II lens under conditions specified by the Camera and Imaging  
Products Association (CIPA). Individual movies can be up to 20 minutes in length or 4 GB in size;  
recording may end before these limits are reached if the camera temperature rises.  
Technical Notes 363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The following can reduce battery life:  
Using the monitor  
Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) photographs  
Slow shutter speeds  
Using a GP-1or GP-1A GPS unit  
Using an Eye-Fi card  
Using a WU-1a wireless mobile adapter  
Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon  
EN-EL14a batteries:  
Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce  
battery performance.  
Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose  
their charge if left unused.  
364 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
d (Dynamic-area AF) ...................... 78  
e (Auto-area AF) .............................. 78  
f (3D-tracking) .......................... 78, 79  
6 (Face-priority AF) .............. 145, 147  
7 (Wide-area AF) ................... 145, 147  
8 (Normal-area AF) ............... 145, 147  
9 (Subject-tracking AF) .... 145, 147  
L (Matrix metering) ........................114  
M (Center-weighted metering) ..114  
N (Spot metering) ...........................114  
o (auto flash) ............................... 90  
j (red-eye reduction) ............. 90, 92  
q (rear-curtain sync) ................. 92  
E (Exposure compensation) ........118  
m (White balance) ...........................124  
L (Preset manual) .........................129  
3 (“Beep” indicator) ........................247  
I (focus indicator) .............. 27, 81, 84  
N (flash-ready indicator) .... 6, 31, 304  
a (live view) .............. 32, 37, 142, 155  
a (Lv) button ............ 32, 37, 142, 155  
P button ................................9, 151, 171  
t (Memory buffer) ....................69, 362  
Symbols  
i (Auto mode) ............................... 4, 25  
j (Auto (flash off) mode) ........... 4, 25  
k (Portrait) ....................................... 5, 47  
l (Landscape) ................................ 5, 47  
p (Child) ........................................... 5, 48  
m (Sports) ......................................... 5, 48  
n (Close up) .................................... 5, 48  
o (Night portrait) .......................... 5, 49  
q (Special effects) ................. 5, 50  
% (Night vision) ............................. 5, 51  
S (Super vivid) ................................ 5, 51  
U (Photo illustration) ............ 5, 52, 56  
g (Color sketch) ..................... 5, 52, 57  
' (Toy camera effect) ........... 5, 52, 58  
( (Miniature effect) .............. 5, 53, 59  
3 (Selective color) ................. 5, 53, 61  
1 (Silhouette) ................................. 5, 54  
2 (High key) .................................... 5, 54  
3 (Low key) ..................................... 5, 54  
) (HDR painting) ........................... 5, 55  
I (Easy panorama) ............... 5, 55, 63  
P (Programmed auto) ....... 4, 100, 102  
S (Shutter-priority auto) .. 4, 100, 104  
g (Guide) ........................................41  
U (flexible program) ....................... 103  
8 (Single frame) ................................67  
I (Continuous) ...........................67, 68  
E (Self-timer) ................................67, 71  
" (Delayed remote (ML-L3)) .67, 97  
# (Quick-response remote (ML-L3)) ..  
67, 97  
3D-tracking (AF-area mode) ... 78, 79  
420-pixel RGB sensor ..230, 291, 344,  
346  
A
A/V cable .............................................215  
AC adapter ............................... 306, 311  
Access lamp ......................................... 28  
Accessories .........................................306  
Accessory terminal ................ 258, 309  
J (Quiet shutter release) .........67, 70  
c (Single-point AF) ..........................78  
Technical Notes 365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Accessory terminal accessories .. 309  
Active D-Lighting ............................ 122  
Adobe RGB ........................................ 225  
AE lock ................................................. 116  
AE-L ...................................................... 116  
AE-L/AF-L button ................81, 116, 252  
AF .................................. 7482, 144147  
AF-A ........................................................74  
AF-area mode ............................ 78, 145  
AF-assist illuminator .......77, 229, 294  
AF-C .........................................................74  
AF-F ...................................................... 144  
AF-S ............................................... 74, 144  
A-M mode switch ...............23, 83, 353  
Angle of view .................................... 298  
Aperture-priority auto ................... 106  
Auto (White balance) ..................... 124  
Auto distortion control ................. 225  
Auto flash ..............................................90  
Auto image rotation ...................... 243  
Auto info display ............................. 238  
Auto ISO sensitivity control 227, 228  
Auto off timers ................................. 245  
Auto-area AF (AF-area mode) ........78  
Autoexposure lock ......................... 116  
Autofocus ................... 7482, 144147  
Auto-servo AF ......................................74  
Available settings ............................ 326  
Burst ....................................................... 68  
Buttons ................................................251  
C
Calendar playback ...........................181  
Capture NX 2 .....................................307  
CEC ........................................................218  
Center-weighted metering ..........114  
Charger ............................... 14, 306, 351  
Choose start/end point .................164  
Clean image sensor .........................314  
Clock ..............................................18, 242  
Clock battery ....................................... 24  
Cloudy (White balance) .................124  
CLS .............................................. 299, 300  
Color outline ......................................281  
Color sketch ................................57, 282  
Color space ........................................225  
Color temperature ...........................126  
Compatible lenses ...........................289  
Continuous (Release mode) ... 67, 68  
Continuous-servo AF ........................ 74  
CPU contacts .....................................291  
CPU lens ..............................................289  
Creative Lighting System .... 299, 300  
Cropping (PictBridge) ....................209  
Cross screen (Filter effects) ..........270  
Cyanotype ..........................................269  
B
D
Battery .................................14, 306, 351  
Beep ..................................................... 247  
Black-and-white ............................... 269  
Blue intensifier (Filter effects) ..... 270  
Body cap .........................................2, 308  
Border (PictBridge) ......................... 209  
Built-in AF-assist illuminator 77,229,  
294  
Date and time ............................18, 242  
Date counter ........................... 254, 255  
Date format .................................18, 242  
Daylight saving time ...............18, 242  
DCF version 2.0 .................................360  
Delayed remote (ML-L3) .......... 67, 97  
Delete ...................................................192  
Delete all images .............................193  
Delete current image .....................192  
Delete selected images .................193  
Built-in flash ............................... 89, 295  
Bulb ...................................................... 110  
366 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Device control (HDMI) ................... 218  
Digital Print Order Format .211,213,  
360  
Diopter adjustment control . 20, 307  
Direct sunlight (White balance) . 124  
Distortion control ............................ 280  
D-Lighting .......................................... 266  
DPOF ................................. 211, 213, 360  
DPOF print order ............................. 213  
Dynamic-area AF ................................78  
Flash ready indicator .......... 6, 31, 304  
Flash sync speed .......................93, 344  
Flexible program ..............................103  
Flicker reduction .................... 157, 241  
Fluorescent (White balance) .......124,  
126  
Fn button ................................... 251, 258  
f-number ................................... 101, 106  
Focal length .......................................298  
Focal length scale ............................353  
Focal plane mark ................................ 84  
Focus ..................7484, 144147, 154  
Focus indicator ..................... 27, 81, 84  
Focus lock ............................................. 81  
Focus mode ................................74, 144  
Focusing screen ...............................343  
Focusing the viewfinder .................. 20  
Focus-mode switch .................... 23, 83  
Format .................................................234  
Format memory card ...............22, 234  
Frame interval (Slide show) ..........200  
Frame size/frame rate ....................158  
Framing grid ......................................150  
Front-curtain sync ............................. 92  
Full-frame playback ........................170  
Full-time-servo AF ...........................144  
E
Easy panorama ....................................63  
Edit movie .................................164, 168  
Electronic rangefinder ............ 84, 248  
Exposure compensation ............... 118  
Exposure indicator .................109, 149  
Exposure lock .................................... 116  
Exposure meters .................................31  
Exposure mode ................................ 100  
External microphone ............161, 309  
Eye-Fi upload .................................... 261  
F
Face-priority AF ................................ 145  
File information ............................... 172  
Filter effects .................... 139, 141, 270  
Filters ................................................... 306  
Fine-tuning white balance ........... 127  
Firmware version ............................. 262  
Fisheye ................................................ 280  
Flash ....................................... 31, 89, 299  
Flash (White balance) .................... 124  
Flash cntrl for built-in flash .......... 229  
Flash compensation ....................... 120  
Flash control ..................................... 230  
Flash mode ....................................90, 92  
Flash range ...........................................94  
G
GPS unit ..................................... 259, 309  
Green intensifier (Filter effects) ..270  
Guide mode ......................................... 41  
H
H.264 ....................................................348  
HDMI ........................................... 217, 360  
HDMI-CEC ...........................................218  
Help ........................................................ 11  
Hi (Sensitivity) ..................................... 95  
High definition ........................ 217, 360  
Highlights ................................. 173, 220  
Technical Notes 367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Histogram ........................174, 220, 271  
Manual focus .................... 83, 144, 154  
Manual movie settings ..................159  
Matrix metering ...............................114  
Maximum aperture ..................84, 343  
Maximum sensitivity ......................227  
Medium (Image size) ........................ 87  
Memory buffer .................................... 69  
Memory card ...........15, 234, 310, 362  
Memory card capacity ...................362  
Metering .............................................114  
Microphone ............................. 158, 161  
Miniature effect .........................59, 283  
Minimum shutter speed ...............227  
Mirror .............................................. 2, 317  
Mode dial .................................................4  
Monitor brightness .........................235  
Monochrome (Set Picture Control) ...  
135  
I
Image comment .............................. 244  
Image Dust Off ref photo ............. 239  
Image overlay ................................... 272  
Image quality .......................................85  
Image review .................................... 221  
Image size .............................................87  
Incandescent (White balance) .... 124  
Info display format ......................... 236  
In-focus indicator .................27, 81, 84  
Information display ....................7, 236  
Infrared receiver .................................98  
ISO sensitivity ............................ 95, 226  
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital  
SLR ...................................................... 230  
J
Mounting mark ..........................16, 353  
MOV ......................................................250  
Movie quality ....................................158  
Movie settings ..................................158  
Movie-record button ...............38, 156  
Movies ..........................................37, 155  
JPEG ........................................................85  
JPEG basic .............................................85  
JPEG fine ................................................85  
JPEG normal .........................................85  
L
Landscape (Set Picture Control) 135  
Language .................................... 18, 243  
Large (Image size) ..............................87  
Lens focus ring .......................... 83, 353  
Lens mount ..................................... 2, 84  
Lens vibration reduction switch ..23,  
353, 355  
N
NEF (RAW) ...................................85, 275  
NEF (RAW) processing ....................275  
Neutral (Set Picture Control) .......135  
Nikon Transfer 2 ...............................204  
No. of copies (PictBridge) .............209  
Noise reduction ................................226  
Non-CPU lens ....................................292  
Normal-area AF ................................145  
Number of shots ..............................363  
Live view ......................32, 37, 142, 155  
Location data ..................179, 259, 309  
Lock mirror up for cleaning ......... 317  
O
M
Optional flash .......................... 230, 299  
Output resolution (HDMI) .............218  
Manual ......................................... 83, 108  
368 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Overview data .................................. 178  
Rear-curtain sync ............................... 92  
Recent settings .................................288  
Red intensifier (Filter effects) .......270  
Red-eye correction ..........................267  
Red-eye reduction ...................... 90, 92  
Release mode ...................................... 67  
Remote control ................ 97, 258, 308  
Remote cord ...................110, 258, 309  
Remote on duration (ML-L3) .......247  
Remote shutter release ..................258  
Reset ........................................... 224, 233  
Reset setup options ........................233  
Reset shooting menu .....................224  
Resize ...................................................277  
Retouch menu ..................................263  
24, 26, 353  
P
Page size (PictBridge) .................... 209  
Panoramas .....................................63, 66  
Perspective control ......................... 282  
Photo illustration ...................... 56, 281  
Photo information .................172, 220  
PictBridge ..................................208, 360  
Picture Controls ......................135, 137  
Playback .............................................. 170  
Playback display options .............. 220  
Playback folder ................................. 220  
Playback information ............172, 220  
Playback menu ................................. 219  
Portrait (Set Picture Control) ....... 135  
Power connector ....................306, 311  
Power switch ........................................17  
Preset manual (White balance) . 124,  
129  
RGB .............................................. 174, 225  
RGB histogram ..................................174  
Rotate tall ............................................221  
S
Press the shutter-release button all  
the way down ....................................28  
Press the shutter-release button  
halfway ..........................................27, 28  
Print (DPOF) ..............................211, 214  
Print date ............................................ 254  
Print select ......................................... 211  
Programmed auto .......................... 102  
Protecting photographs ............... 184  
Save selected frame ........................168  
Scene auto selector ........................... 34  
Scene mode ......................................... 47  
Select to send to smart device ....189  
Selective color ............................61, 284  
Self-timer ..............................67, 71, 246  
Sepia .....................................................269  
Set clock from satellite ...................259  
Set Picture Control ..........................137  
Setup menu .......................................231  
Shade (White balance) ...................124  
Shooting data ...................................176  
Shooting menu .................................222  
Shutter-priority auto .......................104  
Shutter-release button ...28, 81, 116,  
252  
Q
Quick retouch ................................... 279  
Quick-response remote (ML-L3) ..67,  
97  
Quiet shutter release ..................67, 70  
R
Side-by-side comparison ..............286  
Single frame (Release mode) ......... 67  
Rangefinder ................................ 84, 248  
Rating .........................................186, 200  
Technical Notes 369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Single-point AF (AF-area mode) ...78  
Single-servo AF ......................... 74, 144  
Size ................................................ 87, 158  
Skylight (Filter effects) ................... 270  
Slide show .......................................... 198  
Slot empty release lock ................. 253  
Slow sync .......................................90, 92  
Small (Image size) ..............................87  
Soft (Filter effects) ........................... 270  
Special effects mode .........................50  
Speedlight ......................................... 299  
Spot metering .................................. 114  
sRGB ..................................................... 225  
Standard (Set Picture Control) ... 135  
Standard i-TTL fill-flash for digital  
Standby timer ...................31, 245, 259  
Start printing (PictBridge) ...210, 212  
Storage folder ................................... 257  
Straighten .......................................... 279  
Subject-tracking AF ........................ 145  
V
Vibration reduction ..................23, 355  
Video mode ............................. 216, 260  
Viewfinder .............................. 6, 20, 343  
Viewfinder eyepiece cap ................. 73  
ViewNX 2 ................................... 201, 204  
Vivid (Set Picture Control) ............135  
Volume ...................................... 163, 199  
W
Warm filter (Filter effects) .............270  
WB .........................................................124  
White balance ...................................124  
Wide-area AF .....................................145  
Wind noise reduction .....................159  
Wireless mobile adapter ..... 260, 309  
Wireless remote controller ...99,258,  
309  
T
Television ........................................... 215  
Thumbnail playback ...................... 180  
Time ..................................................... 110  
Time stamp (PictBridge) ............... 209  
Time zone ................................... 18, 242  
Time zone and date ........................ 242  
Toning ........................................139, 141  
Transition effects ....................200, 220  
Trim ...................................................... 268  
Trimming movies ............................ 164  
Type D lens ........................................ 291  
Type E lens ......................................... 291  
Type G lens ........................................ 291  
U
USB cable .........................204, 208, 309  
UTC ..............................................179, 259  
370 Technical Notes  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in  
part (except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews),  
may be made without written authorization from NIKON  
CORPORATION.  
SB4F02(11)  
6MB19911-02  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Nautique Boat 216v User Manual
NEC Flat Panel Television 2190UXi User Manual
Nokia Cell Phone 2355 User Manual
Oki Printer LP440 User Manual
Oki Soldering Gun MFR 1100 User Manual
Onkyo CD Player DX R700 User Manual
Onkyo DVD Player DV SP404 User Manual
OWI Speaker IWT 83A User Manual
Panasonic Flat Panel Television BUS4803 User Manual
Panasonic Network Card 2SA2009G User Manual